author's personal copy 7.03 laboratory studies of mantle...

77
Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection A. Davaille and A. Limare, Institut de Physique du Globe, Paris, France ª 2007 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved. 7.03.1 Introduction 90 7.03.2 Experimental Setups and Fluids 92 7.03.2.1 Designing an Experiment: Scaling 92 7.03.2.2 Experimental Fluids 93 7.03.2.3 Experimental Setup for Convection 94 7.03.2.3.1 Horizontal pattern visualization 94 7.03.2.3.2 Heat flux determination 94 7.03.2.3.3 Hybrid solution at high Pr and Ra 96 7.03.2.3.4 Moving boundaries and free-slip boundaries 96 7.03.2.3.5 Centrifuge 96 7.03.3 Measurements and Visualization Techniques 97 7.03.3.1 Patterns 97 7.03.3.1.1 Dye 97 7.03.3.1.2 Shadowgraph and schlieren 98 7.03.3.2 Temperature and Heat Flow Measurements 100 7.03.3.2.1 Local temperature measurements 100 7.03.3.2.2 Deflection of a light beam 102 7.03.3.2.3 Interferometry 102 7.03.3.2.4 Isotherms: thermochromic liquid crystals 105 7.03.3.2.5 Heat flow measurements 106 7.03.3.3 Composition 107 7.03.3.4 Fluid Motions 108 7.03.3.4.1 Local measurements 108 7.03.3.4.2 2D and 3D field measurements 108 7.03.3.4.3 Stress and strain rate 109 7.03.3.5 Surface Displacement 109 7.03.4 Rayleigh–Taylor Instabilities 110 7.03.5 Simple Rayleigh–Benard Convection Studies 112 7.03.5.1 Convection at Relatively Low Ra(Ra c Ra 10 6 ) 113 7.03.5.2 Patterns and Defects 115 7.03.5.2.1 Generation of an initial prescribed pattern 115 7.03.5.2.2 Patterns for Pr 100 115 7.03.5.2.3 Patterns for Pr < 100 116 7.03.5.3 Thermal Convection at High Rayleigh Numbers(10 5 Ra) 116 7.03.5.3.1 Thermal boundary layer instabilities 116 7.03.5.3.2 Soft and hard turbulence at low Pr 118 7.03.5.3.3 Large-scale (cellular) circulation and plumes at high Pr 118 7.03.5.4 Convective Regime in an Isoviscous Mantle 119 7.03.6 Temperature-Dependent Viscosity 120 7.03.6.1 Rigid Boundaries 120 7.03.6.1.1 Onset of convection 120 7.03.6.1.2 Patterns and regimes 120 7.03.6.1.3 Characteristics of the stagnant lid regime 122 7.03.6.2 Plate Tectonics in the Laboratory? 123 7.03.6.3 Stagnant-Lid Regime and Lithosphere Cooling 124 89 Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Upload: others

Post on 21-Jul-2020

1 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ConvectionA. Davaille and A. Limare, Institut de Physique du Globe, Paris, France

ª 2007 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

7.03.1 Introduction 90

7.03.2 Experimental Setups and Fluids 92

7.03.2.1 Designing an Experiment: Scaling 92

7.03.2.2 Experimental Fluids 93

7.03.2.3 Experimental Setup for Convection 94

7.03.2.3.1 Horizontal pattern visualization 94

7.03.2.3.2 Heat flux determination 94

7.03.2.3.3 Hybrid solution at high Pr and Ra 96

7.03.2.3.4 Moving boundaries and free-slip boundaries 96

7.03.2.3.5 Centrifuge 96

7.03.3 Measurements and Visualization Techniques 97

7.03.3.1 Patterns 97

7.03.3.1.1 Dye 97

7.03.3.1.2 Shadowgraph and schlieren 98

7.03.3.2 Temperature and Heat Flow Measurements 100

7.03.3.2.1 Local temperature measurements 100

7.03.3.2.2 Deflection of a light beam 102

7.03.3.2.3 Interferometry 102

7.03.3.2.4 Isotherms: thermochromic liquid crystals 105

7.03.3.2.5 Heat flow measurements 106

7.03.3.3 Composition 107

7.03.3.4 Fluid Motions 108

7.03.3.4.1 Local measurements 108

7.03.3.4.2 2D and 3D field measurements 108

7.03.3.4.3 Stress and strain rate 109

7.03.3.5 Surface Displacement 109

7.03.4 Rayleigh–Taylor Instabilities 110

7.03.5 Simple Rayleigh–Benard Convection Studies 112

7.03.5.1 Convection at Relatively Low Ra(Rac�Ra�106) 113

7.03.5.2 Patterns and Defects 115

7.03.5.2.1 Generation of an initial prescribed pattern 115

7.03.5.2.2 Patterns for Pr� 100 115

7.03.5.2.3 Patterns for Pr < 100 116

7.03.5.3 Thermal Convection at High Rayleigh Numbers(105�Ra) 116

7.03.5.3.1 Thermal boundary layer instabilities 116

7.03.5.3.2 Soft and hard turbulence at low Pr 118

7.03.5.3.3 Large-scale (cellular) circulation and plumes at high Pr 118

7.03.5.4 Convective Regime in an Isoviscous Mantle 119

7.03.6 Temperature-Dependent Viscosity 120

7.03.6.1 Rigid Boundaries 120

7.03.6.1.1 Onset of convection 120

7.03.6.1.2 Patterns and regimes 120

7.03.6.1.3 Characteristics of the stagnant lid regime 122

7.03.6.2 Plate Tectonics in the Laboratory? 123

7.03.6.3 Stagnant-Lid Regime and Lithosphere Cooling 124

89

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 2: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

7.03.7 Complications: Internal Heating, Continents and Moving Plates 126

7.03.7.1 Internal Heating 126

7.03.7.1.1 Purely internally heated fluid 126

7.03.7.1.2 Bottom- and internally-heated fluid 126

7.03.7.2 Inhomogeneous Cooling/Continents 127

7.03.7.3 Moving Top Boundary 128

7.03.8 Close-Up on Plumes: Plumes from a Point Source of Buoyancy 130

7.03.8.1 Compositionally Buoyant Plumes 130

7.03.8.2 Thermal Plumes 131

7.03.8.2.1 Thermals 131

7.03.8.2.2 The stem 132

7.03.8.2.3 Thermal starting plumes 133

7.03.8.3 Interaction of Plumes with a Large-Scale Flow 134

7.03.8.4 Plume–Lithosphere Interactions 135

7.03.8.4.1 Interaction with a stagnant lithosphere 135

7.03.8.4.2 Interaction with a moving or rifting lithosphere 135

7.03.9 Inhomogeneous Fluids: Mixing and Thermochemical Convection 136

7.03.9.1 Mixing of Passive Tracers 136

7.03.9.2 Convection in an Initially Stratified Fluid 137

7.03.9.2.1 Regime diagrams 138

7.03.9.2.2 Entrainment and mixing 143

7.03.9.3 Interaction of a Plume with a Density and/or Viscosity Interface 145

7.03.10 Mid-Ocean Ridges and Wax Tectonics 145

7.03.10.1 Can a Buoyant Mantle Upwelling Generate Sufficient Stress to Rupture a Brittle

Crust? 145

7.03.10.2 Morphology of Ridges 145

7.03.11 Subduction-Related Experiments 148

7.03.11.1 Ingredients for Subduction 148

7.03.11.2 The Surface Story and the Initiation of Subduction 149

7.03.11.3 Mantle Flow Induced by a Cold Rigid Slab 151

7.03.11.3.1 Generation of seismic anisotropy 151

7.03.11.3.2 Mantle flow and thermal evolution of the slab 151

7.03.11.4 Coupled Mantle-Slab Fluid System 152

7.03.11.4.1 Fixed rollback velocity 152

7.03.11.4.2 Free rollback velocity 153

7.03.12 Conclusions 155

References 156

7.03.1 Introduction

Because laboratory experiments are crucial for

exploring new physics and testing theories, they

have long played a central role in investigations of

thermal convection and mantle dynamics. This chap-

ter is devoted to laboratory experiments considered

as tools for understanding the physics that governs

mantle dynamics. We shall review both the techni-

ques employed to run well-controlled experiments

and acquire quantitative data, and the results

obtained.

Investigations of mantle dynamics and of thermalconvection have long been closely intertwined.

Indeed, the mantle is cooled from above, heated

from within by radioactive elements, and heated

from below by the core, which loses its heat through

the mantle (see Chapter 7.06). The emergence of

mantle convection models was dictated by the failure

of static, conductive, and/or radiative thermal history

models to account for the mantle temperature

regime, the Earth energy budget, and the Earth’s

lateral surface motions. In the late 1930s, Arthur

Holmes, among others, hypothesized that thermal

90 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 3: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

convection in the Earth’s mantle provided the neces-

sary force to drive continental motions (Holmes,

1931). Convection, which transports heat by material

advection, is the only physical mechanism capable of

explaining these observations. The force driving

advection is gravity, whereby material lighter than

its environment rises while denser material sinks.

Such density anomalies can be produced by differ-

ences in composition and/or temperature. In the

simple configuration of a plane layer (Figure 1), the

former will give rise to Rayleigh–Taylor instabilities,

while the latter will generate ‘Rayleigh–Benard

instabilities.Rayleigh–Benard convection develops when a

plane layer of fluid is heated from below and cooled

from above (Figure 1). It has been identified as a major

feature of the dynamics of the oceans, the atmosphere,

and the interior of stars and planets. First identified by

Count Rumford (1798), the phenomenon was

observed several times in the nineteenth century

(e.g., Thomson, 1882). However, it was the carefully

controlled and quantitative laboratory experiments of

Henri Benard (1900, 1901) that focused the interest of

the scientific community on the problem. Benard stu-

died the patterns of convection developing in thin

layers with a free upper surface. He was interested in

the influence of viscosity on the pattern and use sev-

eral fluids, including spermaceti and paraffin. He

determined quantitatively the characteristic length

scales of the patterns, the deformation of the interface,

and the direction of flow within the fluid. Although we

now know that the beautiful hexagonal patterns he

observed (Figure 1(c)) were due to the temperature

dependence of surface tension (Pearson, 1958), it was

these experiments which motivated Lord Rayleigh to

apply hydrodynamic stability theory to thermal con-

vection in the absence of surface tension (Rayleigh,

1916). When the thermal convection experiments

were carried out correctly, they were found to be

very well predicted by Rayleigh’s theory (e.g.,

Schmidt and Milverton, 1935; Silveston, 1958). For

more on the history of these investigations, see

Chapter 7.01.Thermal convection in an isoviscous fluid is char-

acterized by two parameters. The Rayleigh number

Ra(H, �T) compares the driving thermal buoyancy

forces to the resisting effects of thermal diffusion and

viscous dissipation across the whole system:

RaðH ; �TÞ ¼ �g�TH 3

��½1�

where H is the depth of the layer, �T the tempera-ture difference applied across it, g the gravitationalacceleration, � the thermal expansivity, � the ther-mal diffusivity, and �¼ �/� the kinematic viscosity.Convection starts when Ra exceeds a critical value(Rayleigh, 1916; see Chapters 7.02 and 7.04), andexhibits a sequence of transitions toward chaos asRa increases. The second parameter is the Prandtlnumber, Pr, the ratio of the diffusivity of momentumand that of heat:

Pr ¼ �=� ½2�

(a)

(b)

(c)

ηm, ρm

ηd, ρd = ρm – Δρ

η, ρ

H

H

hd

Ttop

Tbot + ΔT

Figure 1 (a) Rayleigh–Taylor instabilities develop when a

layer of lighter fluid is introduced under a layer of denserfluid. (b) Rayleigh–Benard instabilities develop when a layer

of fluid of density � and viscosity � is heated from below and

cooled from above. (c) Benard cells in spermaceti. From

Benard H (1901) Les tourbillons cellulaires dans une nappeliquide transportant la chaleur par convection en regime

permanent. Annales de Chimie et de Physique 23: 62–144.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 91

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 4: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

When Pr >> 1, the fluid motion stops as soon as theheat source disappears, that is, inertial effects arenegligible compared to viscous effects. This is thecase for the Earth’s mantle, where Pr > 1023.

Numerous theoretical, laboratory, and numericalstudies in the last 50 years have been devoted tocharacterizing thermal convection as a function ofRa and Pr. Laboratory experiments have provedespecially useful for determining patterns and char-acterizing the high Ra regime. For high Pr fluids,isoviscous convection has been studied for Ra up to109, which includes the range of values estimated forthe mantle (106–108).

However, mantle dynamics is much more compli-cated than isoviscous convection, in particular due tothe complex rheology of mantle material (Chapter7.02). For example, the generation of Plate Tectonicsand its coexistence with hot spots is not reproducedin isoviscous fluids. Studies have therefore focused onprogressively more complicated systems, eithertaking a global view (e.g., convection with tempera-ture-dependent rheology, or internal heating) or amore local view to study some particular mantlefeature (such as plumes or subduction). Analoglaboratory experiments have been extensively usedbecause of four advantages: (1) since they let Naturesolve the equations, they can explore new pheno-mena for which such equations do not yet exist. (2)They can also explore ranges of parameters, or geo-metries, where the equations are too non-linear to besolved analytically or numerically. (3) They areinherently three-dimensional (3-D). (4) They canusually be run in the appropriate range of mantleparameters (which is not the case for the atmosphereor the oceans).

This chapter is organized as follows: Sections7.03.2 and 7.03.3 are devoted to experimental setups,fluids, measurements, and visualization methods.Mantle dynamics on geological time scales is domi-nated by ‘fluid’ behavior, so that we can generally useliquids around room temperature, and fluidmechanics techniques. With the development ofcomputer power and lasers, it has become possiblein the last years to measure the temperature, velocity,concentration, and deformation fields in experimen-tal tanks. Sections 7.03.4–7.03.7 focus on gravitationalinstabilities (Rayleigh–Taylor instabilities andRayleigh–Benard convection). Sections 7.03.8–7.03.11 describes the laboratory experiments relatedto more specific mantle features – plumes, mixing,accretion, and subduction – which are also describedmore fully in other chapters of this volume.

7.03.2 Experimental Setups andFluids

7.03.2.1 Designing an Experiment: Scaling

The goal of any fluid mechanics modeling is to

determine ‘scaling laws’, or functional relations thatlink certain parameters of interest and the variousother parameters on which they depend. These scal-

ing laws then make it possible to predict the behaviorof similar systems, such as the mantle in geody-

namics. Hence, there is no question of building aminiature Earth in the laboratory. A phenomenonhas to be selected, and a simplified laboratory

model is then constructed, where only a few para-meters can vary and in a controlled manner. Eachindividual experiment aims at describing, through

quantitative measurements, the behavior of the sys-tem for a given set of control parameters. By varying

systematically the values of these parameters, a data-base is constituted. Scaling laws derived fromfundamental physical principles can then be tested

against the experimental data.However, the results of a laboratory experiment

will be applicable to other natural systems, such as

the mantle, only if the dynamic similarity betweenthe scaled-down system (laboratory, computer) andthe natural system is respected. Dynamic similarity

can be viewed as a generalization of the concept ofgeometrical similarity (see Chapter 7.04), and requires

the following:

1. Similar boundary conditions (mechanical, ther-mal, geometry).

2. Similar rheological laws. In other words, themechanical equation of state that relates differen-

tial flow stress to strain rate should differ only inthe proportionality constant (e.g., Weijermars andSchmeling, 1986).

3. Similar balances between the different forces oroperative physical effects. Ra and Pr reflect suchbalances.

Dynamic similarity gives birth to a set of dimension-less parameters. When the governing equations areknown, they can be nondimensionalized to make therelevant dimensionless parameters appear explicitlyin the equations and/or the initial and boundaryconditions. When the equations are not known, onemay use the Buckingham-� theorem, which is aconsequence of the fundamental principle that thevalidity of a physical law cannot depend on the unitsin which it is expressed. According to this theorem, if

92 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 5: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

a given experiment is described by N-dimensionalparameters of which M have independent physicaldimensions, then the experiment can be completelydescribed by (N � M)-independent nondimension-less combinations of the dimensional parameters(see Chapter 7.04).

Besides Ra, Pr, and ratios that characterize thevariations of physical properties such as viscosity

within the experimental tank, other importantdimensionless numbers for geodynamics include:

1. the Reynolds number Re, which compares theadvection of momentum by the fluid motion and

the viscous diffusion of momentum:

Re ¼ UH

�½3�

where U is the characteristic velocity in the sys-tem. For the mantle, Re� 10�19.

2. the Peclet number, Pe, when the flow is forced by aboundary velocity U (such as a plate velocity). Pe

compares the heat transport by advection and theheat transport by conduction:

Pe ¼ Ud

�½4�

where d is for example the thickness of the plate.

All systems with the same dimensionless parameter(say Ra) will behave in the same way, irrespective of

their size. However, the timescale and/or the dis-

tance over which the phenomenon occurs willdepend on the system size. This is how convection

in the laboratory on a scale of hours can be analogousto convection in the mantle over geological times.

Dynamical similarity and scaling analysis are there-

fore essential to analog laboratory modeling. Theirprinciples and techniques are discussed in Chapter

7.04.

7.03.2.2 Experimental Fluids

Except when focusing on lithospheric processes such

as accretion or subduction, laboratory experimentsusually assume that mantle material flows like a

Newtonian fluid, with a linear relation between

stress and strain rate. This is especially true forconvection experiments, because non-Newtonian

fluids are usually more difficult to characterize, andto handle.

In the mantle Pr� 1024. This is not possible toobtain in the laboratory, but because the dynamicsbecomes independent of Pr for Pr > 100 (seeSection 7.03.5), the use of fluids with Pr > 100 isadequate to ensure the dominance of viscous overinertial effects.

Another consideration is the temperature depen-dence of viscosity. Solid-state creep is thermallyactivated and therefore mantle material has a highlytemperature-dependent viscosity (e.g., see Chapter2.14). The viscosity ratio across the lithospherewhere the temperature difference is the highestreaches 107. A number of experiments have investi-gated in detail the influence of a strongly temperature-dependent viscosity on convection. The viscosity ofliquids always depends on temperature. The siliconeoils have the smallest, with a change by no more than afactor of 3 over 50�C. Sugar syrups have a muchstronger temperature dependence, with GoldenSyrup (from Tate and Lyle) the winner, showing a106 viscosity change between 60�C and �20�C(Figure 2).

Silicone oils are available in different grades (withviscosity at 20�C between 10 mP s and 103 Pa s), andshould be used when negligible temperature-relatedviscosity variations are required in an experiment.Thickeners in aqueous solutions have also been

–20

10–2

102

104

106

1

0

SIL

GLY

L100

GS

20Temperature (°C)

Vis

cosi

ty (

Pa

s)

40 60

Figure 2 Viscosity as a function of temperature. SIL,

Silicone oil 47V1000; GLY, Glycerol; GS, Golden Syrup;

L100, polybutene.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 93

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 6: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

used (e.g., Tait and Jaupart, 1989; Davaille, 1999a,

1999b; Namiki, 2003). By adding less than 2wt.% of

thickener (ex: Hydroxy-ethylcellulose, trade name

Natrosol), the viscosity of water can be multiplied

by 107 (Figure 3(a)). Although the resulting fluid is

shear-thinning (Figure 3(b)), there is a Newtonian

plateau at the low shear rates that typically obtain in

convection laboratory experiments.Well-controlled experiments require a precise

knowledge of the physical properties of the fluids

used. Thermal conductivity and specific heat do not

change much from one batch to another, and one can

generally rely on the values given by the manufac-

turer. But it is advisable to measure density (and

thermal expansion if needed) and viscosity prior to

any new experiments. Moreover, because of the

temperature dependence of viscosity, experiments

should prefererably be run in a temperature-

controlled laboratory. This will also ensure that elec-

tronic measurements do not drift with time.

7.03.2.3 Experimental Setup forConvection

A thermal convection experiment should minimizeheat losses to allow reliable heat flux determination,and should also allow good flow visualization (pat-tern, thermal structure, etc.). Unfortunately, thesetwo requirements cannot be perfectly met at thesame time. We shall therefore present three com-monly used experimental setups.

7.03.2.3.1 Horizontal pattern visualization

The convecting fluid is bounded between two glassplates; the bottom is heated from below by hot waterflushing along its outer surface, while the top iscooled by cold water flushed along the top, asshown in Figure 4(a) (e.g., Busse and Whitehead,1971; Richter and Parsons, 1975; Whitehead andParsons, 1978; White, 1988; Weinstein and Olson,1990; Weinstein and Christensen, 1991). An alter-native is to use as the bottom heater a metal platewhose upper surface is polished to a mirror finish(e.g., Chen and Whitehead, 1968; Heutmaker andGollub, 1987). The horizontal heat exchangersshould be carefully leveled since imperfect horizon-tal alignment modifies convection patterns and heattransfer (e.g., Namiki and Kurita, 2002; Chilla et al.,2004). Precautions also have to be taken to eliminatelateral inhomogeneities due to the side walls. InBusse and Whitehead’s setup (Figure 4(a)), thearea where observations on convection were madewas bounded on the sides by walls of 20-thick poly-vinylchoride, whose thermal conductivity is close tothat of the working fluid (silicone oil). This pro-vided a working area 80 cm� 80 cm. Outside thesewalls was another convecting region approximately20 cm in width so that the temperature gradients onboth sides of the walls were similar. Visualizationwas done using the shadowgraph technique (seeSection 7.03.3), whereby collimated light (i.e., withparallel rays) is directed vertically up through thetank (Figure 4(a)). In the convecting fluid, theindex of refraction of light depends on temperaturesuch that light rays diverge away from hot regionsand converge toward colder regions. The projectionof the resulting rays onto a white screen thus showhot zones as dark shadows and cold zones as con-centration of brightness.

7.03.2.3.2 Heat flux determination

The dependence of the global heat transport on con-vection characteristics is one of the fundamental

0

Vis

cosi

ty (

Pas

)

10–2

1

102

104(a)

0.5Natrosol concentration (wt.%)

1 1.5 2

0.01

Newtonian

Non-Newtonian

1 100Shear rate (s–1)

Vis

cosi

ty (

Pas

)

0.1

1

10

100(b)

+ + + + + ++++++++++++++++++++++++

++++

++ ++

+

Figure 3 Natrosol aqueous solutions. (a) Viscosity as a

function of shear rate (measured with a Haake rotativeviscometer) for 1.4 wt.% Natrosol. There is a Newtonian

plateau for low shear rates. (b) Viscosity as a function of the

Natrosol concentration. From Davaille A (1999a) Two-layer

thermal convection in viscous fluids Journal of FluidMechanics 379: 223–253.

94 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 7: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

questions of Rayleigh–Benard studies (see Section

7.03.4). The most accurate measurement of the globalheat flow is obtained through the measurement ofthe electric power needed to heat the bottom

plate (e.g., Schmidt and Milverton, 1935; Malkus,

1954; Silveston, 1958; Giannandrea andChristensen, 1993; Brown et al., 2005; Funfschillinget al., 2005). It requires special design of the

Motor-drivenmylar sheet

Mirror

Mirror

PMMAPolystyrene

(b)

(a)

SyrupAl

13

10

105

5

1111

11 11 11

11 11

1 5

11

11

Digital datalogger

ThermocouplesInsulation

Removablewindow

Plexiglastank

Copperplates Fluid

(c)

11 113

3

6 7

3 2

915

5

1211

4 4

118

10

10

1210

13

10

0 10 20 cm

Lightsource

Screen

Cold bath

Hot bath

Convecting fluidStepper

Figure 4 (a) Experimental setup from Richter and Parsons (1975) adapted from Busse and Whitehead (1971). Thermostated

water is flowed in the top and bottom glass assemblages. A mylar sheet can be introduced just underneath the top cold plateand driven by a motor at constant speed. (b) Convection apparatus from Giannandrea and Christensen (1993). 1, convection

tank; 2, heating plate; 3, heating foil; 4, guard heaters; 5, thermal insulation; 6, working fluid; 7, oil-filled gap; 8, cooling block;

9, nickel wire; 10, device for vertical displacement of the Ni-wire; 11, thermocouples; 12, air gap; 13, adjusting screw. (c)

‘hybrid’ experimental setup. The insulation windows can be removed for visualization.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 95

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 8: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

experimental tank in order to minimize the heatlosses from the heating plate to the bottom (e.g.,Figure 4(b)). A second experimental problem is theinfluence of the side walls on the heat transport in thefluid. This problem is significantly reduced when theexperimental tank aspect ratio is large (e.g.,Giannandrea and Christensen, 1993), and by choos-ing a wall of relatively small thermal conductivity(e.g., plexiglas) compared to that of the fluid, plusanother insulation in low conductivity material suchas polystryrene foam. Even with that, sides lossesmust be estimated, and models have been derivedto correct for them (e.g., Ahlers, 2001). A third pro-blem is the effect of the finite conductivity of the topand bottom plates on the heat transport by the fluid(e.g., Chilla et al., 2004; Verzicco, 2004): the less con-ductive the plates, the more the heat transport in thefluid is diminished, and the effect is a function of Ra.A correction has been proposed, which fits well thedata for turbulent convection (Verzicco, 2004; Brownet al., 2005). In practice, the best conductor availableis copper (k¼ 319 W m�1 K�1), followed by alumi-num (k¼ 161 W m�1 K�1). So good heat fluxdetermination precludes the visualization of theplanform because of the metal plates, and also visua-lization from the side because of the insulation.

7.03.2.3.3 Hybrid solution at high Pr and Ra

It is of course necessary to correlate heat flux mea-surements with the geometry of convection.Moreover, modern visualization techniques can givein situ measurements of the velocity, temperature,and concentration fields (see Section 7.03.3), butthey require transparent sides. Therefore, a numberof studies have used a ‘lighter’ setup (Figure 4(c);e.g., Olson, 1984; Jaupart and Brandeis, 1986; Davailleand Jaupart, 1993; Weeraratne and Manga, 1998).The bottom and top heat exhangers are made orcopper or aluminum, and are regulated either byelectric heating or by circulation of thermostatedwater. The tank sides are made of plexiglas or glass.The whole tank is insulated with styrafoam, but theinsulation on the sides can be removed for visualiza-tion. In this configuration, it is advisable to run theexperiments in conditions such that the mean tem-perature inside the experimental cell is close toambient temperature, to minimize heat losses.

Last, to obtain high Rayleigh numbers (106–109)in high Pr viscous fluids, we need fluids thicknessesbetween at least 10 and 50 cm. It is then no longer

possible to have large aspect ratios. It therefore will

always be a possibility that the flow will be influ-

enced by the mechanical boundary conditions (zero

velocity) at the side walls. We shall discuss this

question in more detail later.

7.03.2.3.4 Moving boundaries and

free-slip boundariesTo impose a moving upper boundary (e.g., to simu-

late plate tectonics), a mylar sheet (Figure 4(a)) is

usually introduced just below the upper plate and

slowly driven by a step-motor (e.g., Richter and

Parsons, 1975; Kincaid et al., 1995, 1996; Jellinek

et al., 2003).Because the mantle is bounded by the liquid core

at the bottom, and oceans or atmosphere at the top,

its mechanical outer boundary conditions are free

slip. Moreover, analytical and numerical models

usually are best resolved with free-slip boundary

conditions. To obtain the latter in the laboratory,

thin layers of a fluid much less viscous (at least a

1000 times) than the working fluid must be intro-

duced between the heat exchangers and the high Pr

convecting fluid. For a bottom free-slip condition,

thin layers of mercury (e.g., Solomon and Gollub,

1991) or salted water (e.g., Jellinek et al., 2002;

Jellinek and Manga, 2002, 2004) may be used; while

a thin layer of conductive oil may be used to obtain

a free-slip upper surface (e.g., Giannandrea and

Christensen, 1993). However, since these layers

have a finite conductivity, they will modify the ther-

mal boundary conditions as discussed above.

7.03.2.3.5 CentrifugeSome experiments have been run in centrifuges (e.g.,

Ramberg, 1972; Nataf et al., 1984; Weiermars, 1988),

where the model is subjected to a centrifugal force

able to produce accelerations up to 20 000g. This

approach decreases the experimental time required

and allows the use of very viscous materials (with

Pr > 106) at Rayleigh numbers up to 6� 105. A

detailed description of the experimental setup is

given by Nataf et al., (1984) and Weijermars (1988).

However, this technique is heavy to implement.

With the apparent confirmation (in part because

of the early centrifuge experiments) that convective

dynamics becomes independent of Pr when Pr > 100,

the technique has not been used extensively.

96 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 9: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

7.03.3 Measurements andVisualization Techniques

7.03.3.1 Patterns

Laboratory experiments have been used extensivelyto determine convective and/or mixing patterns. Onethen seeks quantitative information on the morphol-ogy, wavelength, and evolution (plume ascent rate,blob stretching, etc.) of a particular feature in theexperimental fluid.

7.03.3.1.1 Dye7.03.3.1.1.(i) One-shot visualization Patternsand motions in two-fluid experiments such as com-positional plumes (Figure 5, Olson and Singer, 1985,Section 7.03.6), Rayleigh–Taylor instabilities (e.g.,Whitehead and Luther, 1975; see Section 7.03.4),mixing (e.g., Ottino, 1989; see Section 7.03.9) ortwo-layer convection (e.g., Olson, 1984; Olson andKincaid, 1991; Davaille, 1999; see Section 7.03.9) areeasily observed by the addition of dye to one of thetransparent fluids. Most commonly used dyes arefluoresceine, rhodamine, or supermarket food dye.The latter is very easily visualized through illumina-tion with a white light (Figure 5), while the formerare most spectacular using laser sheets (e.g., Tsinoberet al., 1983; Fountain et al., 2000). In mixing experi-ments, the dye can be continuously injected byseringes (e.g., Fountain et al., 2000; Kerr andMeriaux, 2004). In all cases, the dye quantity is sosmall that it does not change the physical propertiesof the fluids.

The fluid initially at rest can also be marked bydye streaks that allow subsequent fluid motions to berecorded by their distortion. Griffiths (1986)

visualized the motions of initially cold fluid due tothe passage of a thermal by injecting (from a seringe)before the run at various heights a number of hor-izontal lines of the same fluid containing a smallconcentration of dye (Figure 6(a)). Using very vis-cous putties, Weijermars (1988, 1989) imprintedblack grids on some cross-sections prior to experi-ments in a centrifuge, which recorded the subsequentdeformation (Figure 6(b)).

7.03.3.1.1.(ii) Electrochemical technique Inwater and aqueous solutions, an electrochemicaltechnique using thymol blue, a pH indicator, can beemployed (Baker, 1966). Thymol blue is either blueor yellow-orange depending upon whether the pH ofthe solution is greater or less than 8. Approximately,0.01% by weight of thymol blue is added to the waterand the solution is titrated to the end-point withsodium hydroxyde. Then, by drop addition of hydro-chloric acid, the solution is made orange in color.When a small DC voltage (�10–20 V) from a dry-cell source is impressed between a pair of electrodessituated within such a fluid, Hþ ions are removedfrom solution at the negative electrode, with a corre-sponding change in color from orange to blue. Thedye thus created is neutrally buoyant and faithfullyfollows the motion of the fluid. Sparrow et al. (1970)used the bottom plate of the experimental cell as thenegative electrode itself, while the positive electrodewas a large copper sheet situated adjacent to the fluidbut well removed from the bottom plate. Theyhereby obtained the first photographs of thermalsrising from a heated horizontal surface (Figure 7).Haramina and Tilgner (2004) recently used the samemethod to image coherent structures in boundary

Figure 5 Morphology of starting plumes when the dyed plume material is injected into a transparent medium. (a, b) Purelycompositional plumes (a) diapiric plume, more viscous than its surroundings; (b) cavity plume, less viscous than its surroundings.

(c) Starting thermal plume: the injected dyed material is hotter and less viscous. (a, b) From Olson P and Singer H (1985). Creeping

plumes. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 158: 511–531. (c) From Laudenbach N and Christensen UR (2001). An optical method for

measuring temperature in laboratory models of mantle plumes. Geophysical Journal International 145: 528–534.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 97

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 10: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

layers of Rayleigh–Benard convection at very highRayleigh numbers.

7.03.3.1.2 Shadowgraph and schlieren

Since the refractive index of a fluid depends ontemperature and composition (e.g., salt or sugar con-tent), convective features in a transparent mediumwill alter the refractive index distribution, also calledschlieren (from the german; sometimes spelled ‘shlie-ren’ in the literature). From the deformation of theoptical wave front, one can therefore deduce infor-mation on the refractive index, hence on thetemperature or compositional field. The opticalmethods are divided into two groups: the shadowand schlieren techniques using the deflection oflight in the measurement media (e.g., Settles, 2001),

and interference methods based on differences oflength of the optical paths, that is, on the phase(e.g., Hauf and Grigull 1970). In the following, weshall refer to a ‘schlieren object’, when consideringthe influence of this object on light deflection, and toa ‘phase object’ when considering its influence on theoptical path length.

Both shadow and schlieren techniques are whole-field integrated optical systems that project line-of-sight information onto a viewing screen or camerafocal plane. They use light intensity and light rayidentification, so that only a good white light sourceis required. They are more appropriate for two-dimensional (2-D) or axisymmetric phenomena sincethey integrate the information along the light ray path,but are still qualitatively useful for any phenomenon.Both techniques have a long history: R. Hooke devel-oped a schlieren method as early as 1672 and the firstpublished shadowgram of a turbulent plume over aflame by Marat dates back to 1783. Settles (2001) givesa comprehensive review of these two techniques.

7.03.3.1.2.(i) Shadowgraph Whithout theobject present in the field of view, the light sourceilluminates the screen uniformly. With the objectpresent, some rays are refracted, bent, and deflectedfrom their original paths, producing a shadow. Theoptical inhomogeneities of the object redistribute thescreen illuminance. The illuminance level respondsto the second spatial derivative or Laplacian of the

Figure 7 Thermal boundary layer instabilities in water

visualized by an electrochemical technique. Adapted from

Sparrow EM, Husar RB, and Goldstein RJ (1970).Observations and other characteristics of thermals. Journal

of Fluid Mechanics 41: 793–800.

Figure 6 Fluid initially marked by horizontal dye streaks. (a) Rise of a pocket of hot fluid (so-called ‘a thermal’); (b) rise of

hot fluid continuously released from a hot source (‘hot plume’). The gravity has been accelerated 2000 times in a centrifuge.

Time increases from bottom to top pictures. (a) From Griffiths RW (1986) Thermals in extremely viscous fluids, includingthe effects of temperature-dependent viscosity. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 166: 115–138. (b) From Weijermars R (1988).

New laboratory method for analyzing deformation and displacement in creeping fluid: Examples from stokes flow and a

thermal plume. Journal of Geophysical Research 93: 2179–2190.

98 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 11: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

refractive index. Best results are obtained when thecell is illuminated by a (quasi-) parallel source oflight (Figures 4(a) and 8(a)). Due to the negativeslope of the temperature dependence of the refractiveindices of most liquids, the hot material acts as adiverging lens and appears dark (Figure 8(b)),while the cold material acts as a focusing lensand appears light (Figure 8(c)). Shadowgraphtechniques are easy (and cheap!) to implement andallow the visualization of large objects. Sincethey image strong temperature gradients well, theyhave been used to determine convective patternsand measure their characteristic wavelength (e.g.,Chen and Whitehead, 1968; Heutmaker andGollub, 1987; see Section 7.03.5), measure thermalboundary layer thicknesses (Olson et al., 1988), orfollow the evolution of laminar thermal plumes(e.g., Shlien, 1976; Moses et al., 1993). However, thewhole image cannot be interpreted quantitatively interms of temperature.

7.03.3.1.2.(ii) Schlieren The schlieren image isa conjugated optical image of the schlieren objectformed by a lens or a mirror. The method requiresa knife-edge or some other sharp cutoff of the

refracted light. Figure 9(a) presents the diagram ofa simple schlieren system with a knife-edge placed atthe focus of the second lens. Adding an object willbend light rays away from their original paths. Therefracted rays miss the focus of the optical system.The upward-deflected ray brightens a point on thescreen, but the downward-deflected ray hits theknife-edge causing a dark point against a bright back-ground. So a vertical gradient of the refractive indexis converted into an amplitude difference. In general,the illuminance level of the schlieren image respondsto the first derivative of the refractive index on adirection perpendicular to the knife-edge. Figures9(b) and 9(c) show the schlieren image of a hotplume obtained with a horizontal and vertical knifeedge, respectively. Figure 9(d) shows the schlierenimage of the same plume using a circular spatial filterof 0.5 mm diameter. The bright line in the center ofthe image and contours represent the zones with zerorefractive index gradient.

For weak disturbances, the schlieren techniquehas a much higher sensitivity than the shadowgraph.It has been used to visualize the onset of thermalconvection above a heated horizontal plate(Schmidt and Milverton, 1935), 2-D boundary

Lightsource

Collimatinglens

Beamsplitter

Experimentalcell

Frostedscreen

Camera

Mirror

(a) (b)

(c)

Figure 8 Shadowgraph. (a) Alternative setup to Figure 4(a) when the bottom plate of the cell is a mirror. (b) Hot thermal

plume out of a small heat source. (c) cold thermal instabilities from a cold horizontal plate. From Jaupart C and Brandeis G(1986) The stagnant bottom layer of convecting magma chambers. Earth and Planetary Science Letters 80: 183–199. Cold

material focuses light and appears bright, whereas hot material acts as a divergent lens and appears dark.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 99

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 12: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

layers along vertical walls (e.g., Hauf and Grigull,

1970), and shock waves (e.g., Settles, 2001). Another

advantage over shadowgraph is the 1:1 image

correspondence with the object of study. Moreover,

3-D study of the phase object is also possible

by using a multisource system (Hanenkamp and

Merzkirch, 2005).Other optical methods can be derived from schlie-

ren techniques. In the so-called ‘lens-and-grid’

techniques, an array of light/dark stripes is used as

a background grid. This simple method, also called

background grid distortion, can be used when a large

field-of-view is necessary with no need for high

sensitivity. The sensitivity can be improved by add-

ing another grid between the focusing lens and the

image plane (Figure 10). The Moire method can be

seen as variant of lens-and-grid method with grids on

either sides of the schlieren object. Dalziel et al. (2000)

contributed to this method by simulating electroni-

cally the second grid in the image capture device.

Another variant called Moire shearing interferome-

try (or Talbot interferometer) was used for mapping

phase objects such as candle flames (Lohmann and

Silva, 1972).

7.03.3.2 Temperature and Heat FlowMeasurements

Since the precise characterization of thermal convec-tion requires the quantitative knowledge of thetemperature field, temperature measurements are amajor step in data acquisition. Local measurementshave long been provided by thermocouples or ther-mistors embedded within the flow, but with the riskof disturbing it. The last 30 years have seen thedevelopment of noninvasive methods. Laser beamscan and interferometry techniques can provideaccurate temperature structure of 2-D or axisym-metric features. More recently, the use ofthermochromic liquid crystals has allowed for thefirst time the accurate determination of a fully 3-D,time-dependent temperature field.

7.03.3.2.1 Local temperature

measurements

Point temperature measurements can be obtainedelectronically using the variation with temperatureof the electrical resistance of metals (Pt resistance

(a)

(b) (c) (d)

Lightsource

Lens LensFlow cell Knife-edgeRecording

plane

Figure 9 Schlieren. (a) Optical setup. (b–d) Pictures of a thermal plume out of a small heat source obtained with

(b) a horizontal knife edge, (c) a vertical knife edge, and (d) a 0.5 mm diameter pin hole.

100 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 13: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

thermometers, thermistors) or using the thermoelec-tric effect at the junction between two metals(thermocouples).

Pt-thermometers exploit the increase with tem-perature of the electrical resistance of platinum. Themost widely used sensor is the 100 � or 1000 �platinum resistance thermometer. They are themost accurate and stable sensors over a long timeperiod. However, they are expensive and do notcome in diameters smaller than a few millimeters.So they are generally used to calibrate all the othertemperature sensors in a lab, but are not used directlyin the experimental cell.

Thermistors are made from certain metal oxideswhose resistance decreases with increasing tempera-ture. Their behavior is highly nonlinear, which limitstheir useful temperature span, and they are less stablethan Pt-thermometers. However, they are cheaper,and can be produced in very small designs (0.1 mm)with a fast response and low thermal mass. Themeasurement of temperature then requires an

electric power supply and a voltmeter. Properly cali-brated, thermistors can give a precision of 0.002�Cover a 10�C range. They are used in high Rayleighnumber convection experiments in water and lowerviscosity fluids (e.g., Castaing et al., 1989; Niemelaet al., 2000; Chilla et al., 2004).

Thermocouples are based on the thermoelectriceffect: the junction between two different metals pro-duces a voltage which increases with temperature. Inorder for this thermal voltage to produce a flow ofcurrent, the two metals must also be connectedtogether at the other end so that a closed circuit isformed. With different temperatures at the junctionsthe voltages generated are different and a currentflows. A thermocouple can thus only measure tem-perature differences between the measurementjunction and the reference junction. The latter is ata known temperature, which is nowadays usually thatof a commercial electronic ice-point cell. Thetemperature range of thermocouples is bigger thanfor thermistors and their behavior is more linear.

Grid(a)

(b) (c)

Flow cellLens

Cutoffgrid

Recordingplane

Figure 10 Lens-and-grid method. (a) Optical setup. (b, c) Same thermal plume as Figure 9(b) obtained with(b) a vertical grid and (c) an horizontal grid.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 101

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 14: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

However, the voltage produced by the thermoelec-tric effect is very small. For the commonly used type‘K’and type ‘E’, it amounts, respectively, to 40 and60 mV per degree celsius, so that a six-digit voltmeterwill allow temperature measurements with an accu-racy of 0.025�C. Their response time is about 2 s,that is, much shorter than the typical timescale ofinstabilities in viscous fluids.

The temperature sensors can be introduced per-manently in the experimental tank either one by oneat different locations (e.g., Sparrow et al., 1970;Davaille and Jaupart, 1993; Weeraratnee andManga, 1998), or on given vertical or horizontalprofiles (e.g., Guillou and Jaupart, 1995; Le Bars andDavaille, 2002, 2004a). The latter allows one to fol-low the temperature profiles through time but thenumber of sensors in a 2-mm-diameter probe is lim-ited to 14. Alternatively, the sensors can be mountedon a stepping motor and moved vertically to measurethe vertical temperature profile (Figure 4(b)). Withviscous fluids, a large volume of fluid is carried alongeach time the probe is moved to a new depth.Therefore, the probe must be kept several minutesat the same height in order for the system to equili-brate, and the vertical temperature profiles aredetermined from the time-averaged measurementsat each depth (e.g., Olson, 1984; Giannandrea andChristensen, 1993; Matsumoto et al., 2006).

It is also possible to measure directly an horizontalaverage of the temperature field by stretching a set ofvery thin platinum wires (0.2 mm diameter) horizon-tally across the experimental cell (Figure 8(c); Jaupartand Brandeis, 1986; Davaille and Jaupart, 1993;Giannandrea and Christensen, 1993). Because thewire resistance varies as a function of temperature,these wires are operated in the same way as thermistors,within a circuit made of a stable precision tensiongenerator and a precision resistance. This setup isvery delicate and time consuming to calibrate, butallows one to measure every second the horizontallyaveraged temperature with a 0.1�C accuracy with a six-digit voltmeter. This method was used to study pene-trative convection in constant-viscosity fluids (Jaupartand Brandeis, 1986) and in strongly temperature-dependent viscosity fluids (Davaille and Jaupart, 1993,1994).

The advantages of local temperature sensors aretheir high precision and the ability to obtain longtime series (high-frequency sampling and/or longrun) at low cost. However, the sensors are introducedwithin the fluid, which imposes a zero velocity con-dition for the flow on their surface. They therefore

always perturb the flow locally. For nonsteady flowand thin probes, this perturbation remains negligible-and the probes do not preferentially focus convectivefeatures on themselves (e.g., Davaille and Jaupart,1993). However, for steady flow (like low Rayleighnumber convection), upwellings or downwellings canbe locked on the temperature probes. In such cases,one should use only removable temperature sensorsmounted on step motors, and/or the nonintrusivemethods to which we turn now.

7.03.3.2.2 Deflection of a light beam

In the cases of 2-D or axisymmetrical refractive indexdistributions, it is possible to recover the temperaturefield by scanning the test zone with a laser beam andrecording its deflection. Nataf and et al., (1988) andRasenat et al. (1989) applied this method to determinethe type of coupling in two-layer convection at lowRayleigh numbers. Laudenbach and Christensen(2001) described the method in detail for the axisym-metric case (Figure 11) and applied it to thermalplume conduit and solitary waves.

The same treatment can be applied to the lens-and-grid methods described in Section 7.03.3.1.2,since the ray displacement can be calculated fromthe grid distortion provided that the structure is 2-Dor axisymmetrical. The spatial resolution of themethod then depends on the spatial frequency ofthe grid lines.

7.03.3.2.3 Interferometry

Compared to shadowgraph and schlieren methods,interferometric methods offer more detailed infor-mation about the phase object (e.g., Yang, 1989),since they play with the light path, but they usuallyrequire laser light and a good optical control. Theyhave been used for pattern determination (e.g., Natafet al., 1981, 1984, 1988; Jaupart et al., 1984; Kaminskiand Jaupart, 2003) as well as for quantitative mea-surement of the temperature field (e.g., Gebhart et al.,1970; Shlien and Boxman, 1981).

7.03.3.2.3.(i) Mach–Zender interferometry

The most common two-beam interferometer is theMach–Zender interferometer (Figure 12(a); Haufand Grigull, 1970). The phase object is placed inone of the legs of the interferometer formed by twobeam-splitter mirrors and two total reflecting mir-rors. For a 2-D object, the interference fringes can beinterpreted as isothermal lines. It has been used forboundary-layer dynamics along vertical walls or indouble-diffusive systems (e.g., Lewis et al., 1982), and

102 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 15: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

steady laminar plumes above a horizontal line heatsource (Figure 12(b); Gebhart et al., 1970). For a 3-Dobject, the phase difference between the two opticalpaths is integrated over the longitudinal length ofthe object, and the interferogram is not readilyinterpretable (Merzkirch, 1993). In a cylindrical sym-metry the radial temperature distribution can beobtained rather simply by an Abel transformation.If the refractive index has no symmetry, tomographyalgorithms and reconstruction techniques have tobe applied. The Mach–Zender interferometer wasused to measure the temperature field of axisym-metric, laminar thermal plumes in liquids(Figure 12(c); e.g., Boxman and Shlien, 1978;Shlien and Boxman, 1979, 1981; Chay and Shlien1986) and for turbulent mixing of salt solutions(Boxman and Shlien, 1981). More recently, Qi et al.(2006) used the Michelson interferometer, moreoften used to measure surface displacement (seeSection 7.03.3.5), to measure the temperature fieldof 3-D axisymmetrical flames.

Holographic interferometry was introduced inflow visualization by Heflinger et al. (1966) andTanner (1966). Holography has opened a newdimension for two-beam interferometry: thereference and test beams can be separated in timerather than space. In a holographic interferometertwo consecutive exposures are taken through thefield of interest, usually the first exposure withoutobject and the second in the presence of an object ofvarying temperature. The double exposed plate isdeveloped and placed in the holographic referencebeam for reconstruction. The pattern which becomesvisible after this reconstruction is equivalent to theone obtained by a Mach–Zender interferometer(Merzkirch, 1993; Hauf and Grigull, 1970). Themain advantage of holographic interferometry over‘classical’ interferometers is that, since the geometri-cal path of the signal in the two exposures is identical,the quality of the optical components is not crucial.The eventual optical disturbances and impurities inthe test section cancel out.

He–Nelaser

Oscillatingmirror

Experimentalcell

LensLens

Screen

f f

(a)

–50

Tem

pera

ture

(°C

)

–0.03

–0.02

–0.01

0.00

0.01

0.02

0.03(c)

30

20

40

50

60

70

80

90

100(b)

–40 –30 –20 –10 0 10

Def

lect

ion

angl

e, α

(ra

d)

Radius (mm)20

x (mm)30 40 50 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50

Figure 11 Deflection of a laser beam by a thermal plume. (a) Experimental setup. (b) Radial temperature structure of the

plume. (c) Beam deflection angle. Adapted from Laudenbach N and Christensen UR (2001). An optical method for measuring

temperature in laboratory models of mantle plumes. Geophysical Journal International 145: 528–534.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 103

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 16: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

7.03.3.2.3.(ii) Differential interferometry

Differential interferometry (also called shearinginterferometry) is a method to measure derivativesof light phase distortions. In practice, this can be donein two ways. One possibility is to send two beamsslightly displaced through a phase object and to putthem back together on the camera. The best way fordoing this is to use two Wollaston prisms and polar-izers (Oertel and Buhler, 1978; Nataf et al., 1981).Another possibility is to divide one wave intotwo identical beams behind the object and to putthem on a camera with a small displacement. Thiscan be done for instance by using one Wollastonprism (Sernas and Fletcher, 1970; Small et al., 1972).Another variant is the use of a Mach–Zender inter-ferometer with the phase under investigation placedoutside (Pretzel et al., 1993). In this arrangement,using a very compact Mach–Zender interferometerminimized its inherent sensitivity to vibrations.Another simple way of separating into two beams isto use an optical flat plate tilted at a certain angle(Figure 13; Jaupart et al., 1984; Kaminski and Jaupart,2003). Extinction lines follow constant horizontaltemperature gradients. Vertical extinction linesaway from the plume correspond to light beamsthrough uniform background.

The main advantage of differential interferometryis its variable sensitivity: carrier fringe orientationand frequency can be chosen separately. It is there-fore possible to visualize with the same apparatus theflow configuration in two fluids with very differenttemperature dependence of the refractive index (e.g.,Oertel and Buhler, 1978). Moreover, the separationbetween the object and the interferometer facilitatesthe investigation of large and complicated objects.The evaluation of the interferogram can be done by

(a)

(b)

(c)

Mirror 2

Mirror 1

Beamsplitter 2

Beamsplitter 1

Testarea

Screen

Figure 12 Mach–Zender interferometry. (a) Set up. (b) 2-D

laminar plume from a heat line. From Gebhart B, Pera W,

and Schorr A (1970) Steady laminar natural convectionplumes above a horizontal line heat source. International

Journal of Heat and Mass Tranfer 13: 161–171. (c)

Axisymmetric laminar plume from a point source in water.

From Shlien DJ and Boxman RL (1981) Laminar startingplume temperature field measurement. International Journal

of Heat and Mass Transfer 24: 919–930.

(a)

(b)

Screen

Test cellFlat optical

plate

Figure 13 Differential interferometry. (a) Setup.

(b) Thermal plume in silicone oil V5000.

104 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 17: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Fourier analysis, and the result, being the first deri-vative of the integral phase shift caused by the object,is obtained with high accuracy. For radially symme-trical objects, the spatial distribution of the refractionindex can be obtained easily because the Abel inver-sion formula is reduced to a simple integration, whichcan be done more reliably than a differentiation. Inthat respect, differential interferometry results areless noisy than Mach–Zender interferometry, wherethe spatial distribution of the refractive index isobtained through numerical differentiation of theoptical path difference. More details on the digitalprocessing of interferograms can be found in themonograph by Yang (1989).

Speckle interferometry can also enter into thiscategory (Merzkirch, 1995). In double-exposurespeckle photography, two speckle patterns arerecorded on the same photographic plate. Betweenthe two exposures the scattering plate (ground glass)is shifted to obtain the interferometric fringes. Afterphotographic development, the specklegram isscanned by a laser beam. By measuring the Young’sfringe spacing and orientation, it is possible to mea-sure the two components of the displacement andconvert them into deflection angles (resembling forthis reason the shadowgraph and schlieren methods).In addition, precise multiprojection speckle photo-graphy allow the reconstruction of a 3-Dtemperature field using computer tomography(Asseban et al., 2000). Among the most importantadvantages of speckle photography are its spatialresolution (about 0.2 mm) and the possibility to col-lect a great amount of experimental information froma single specklegram. Large amounts of data can beprocessed and analyzed statistically. The potential ofanalyzing spatial characteristics of turbulent flowswas demonstrated (Merzkirch et al., 1998).

7.03.3.2.4 Isotherms: thermochromic

liquid crystals

The use of thermochromic liquid crystals (TLCs)allows one to visualize the temperature field on a 2-D-plane in the fluid flow without perturbing it (Rheeet al., 1984; Dabiri and Gharib, 1991; Willert andGharib, 1991). Liquid crystals are mesomorphic phaseswhich present peculiar properties due to the presenceof some degree of anisotropy (Chandrasekhar, 1977).One particular class of these mesophases, chiral nematics

(cholesterics), have a structure that undergoes an helicaldistortion, and because of their periodic structure, theygenerate Bragg reflections at optical wavelengths. The

pitch of the wavelength of the Bragg-reflected lightdepends on the temperature T (de Gennes and Prost,1993). Thus, the color of the material can changedrastically over a temperature interval of a fewdegrees. When the liquid crystals are illuminated bywhite light, their color changes with increasing tem-perature from colorless to red at low temperatures,passes through green and blue to violet, and turnscolorless again at high temperatures. It was first usedas paint on a surface to determine convective patternsqualitatively (e.g., Chen and Chen, 1989; Lithgow-Bertelloni et al., 2001).

Subsequently, it became possible to mix theTLC slurry directly within the fluid and to illumi-nate the tank cell on cross-sections (Figure 14(a)).One of the main applications of this techniquehas been the study of aqueous turbulent flows(Solomon and Gollub, 1990, 1991; Gluckman et al.,1993; Moses et al., 1993; Dabiri and Gharib, 1996;Park et al., 2000; Pottebaum and Gharib, 2004).The use of this method to measure the temperaturefield quantitatively requires a high-precision colorCCD camera and a very precise calibration of thecolor of the liquid crystals particles against the truetemperature. Moreover, the total temperaturerange accessible with one particular TLC slurry isusually around 2–3�C. This technique has lately beenfurther extended to the joint measurementof temperature and velocity in a 3-D field (Kimuraet al., 1998; Fujisawa and Funatani, 2000; Ciofaloet al., 2003). An uncertainty analysis performedby Fujisawa and Hashizume (2001) gives an errorless than 0.1�C, or 5% of the total imposed tempera-ture difference, for a calibration method based on ahue-saturation-intensity approach (Fujisawa andAdrian, 1999).

Convection in conditions analogous to those ofthe mantle involves viscous fluids (see Section7.03.2) and typical temperature heterogeneities�10–25�C. Therefore, the use of one TLC slurry isnot enough to image the whole temperature field.The use of white light and a single TLC was usedto determine the influence of mechanical (Namikiand Kurita, 1999, 2001) and thermal boundary het-erogeneities (Matsumoto et al., 2006) on thermalconvection. The type of TLC was chosen to imagewell the hot instabilities. This permitted quantifica-tion of the convective pattern, but not accuratemeasurement of the temperature field. Illuminatingseveral TLC slurries by a single laser wavelengthplane sheet and recording the images with a highprecision black and white CCD camera

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 105

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 18: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

(Figure 14(a)), Davaille et al. (2006) demonstrated

that it was possible to obtain isotherms and localtemperature gradients. The laser beam was expanded

into a beam using a cylindrical lens. Each slurry

brightens over a different temperature subrange andtherefore generates a horizontal bright line

(Figure 14(b)). Each stripe presents a finite thick-

ness: although each TLC responds at a givenwavelength to a precise temperature, the polymeric

capsules enclosing them introduce a scatter around

this value. On a plot of the intensity as a function ofdepth, or temperature, each stripe corresponds there-

fore to a peak whose maximum defines the value ofthe ‘isotherm’, and whose thickness gives a measure

of the local temperature gradient. After calibration,

the light intensity maximum gives the ‘isotherm’temperature with a precision of 0.1�C, and the

half width of the bright lines gives the local tempera-

ture gradient. This method was used to study two-layer convection (Le Bars and Davaille, 2002, 2004a,

2004b; Kumagai et al., 2007), plumes arising from a

viscous thermal boundary layer (Davaille andVatteville, 2005) and plumes from a point heat source

(Vatteville, 2004). Since viscous fluid motions areslow, it is possible to scan the experimental cellwith the laser sheet (by means of an oscillating mirrordriven by a galvanometer) to obtain the 3-D struc-ture of the temperature field. This method can becombined with laser-induced fluorescence (LIF) andparticle image velocimetry (PIV) to obtain simulta-neously the composition (see Section 7.03.3.3) andvelocity fields (see Section 7.03.3.4).

7.03.3.2.5 Heat flow measurements

The dependence of the global heat transport onconvection characteristics is one of the fundamentalquestions of Rayleigh–Benard studies (see Section7.03.5).

The most accurate measurement of the globalheat flow is obtained through the measurement ofthe electric power needed to heat the bottom plate(e.g., Schmidt and Milverton, 1935; Malkus, 1954;Silveston, 1958; Giannandrea and Christensen,1993; Brown et al., 2005; Funfschilling et al., 2005).With careful design of the experimental tank in order

CCD camera

Bright greenstripe

Cylindricallens

Optic fiber(a)

(b)

(c) (d) (e)

Plane of light

Laser 532 nm

Figure 14 Temperature and velocity field of a thermal plume out of a localized heat source. (a) Setup. (b) Isotherms.

(c) Streaklines taken over 10 s. (d) Velocity field calculated by PIV. (e) Streamlines calculated from the velocity field.

106 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 19: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

to minimize the heat losses (cf. Section 7.03.2.3), lateresults have reached a precision of 0.1% (e.g.,Funfschilling et al., 2005).

The heat flow can also be deduced from the firstderivative of the measured temperature profiles,either locally (using temperature probes or iso-therms) or horizontally averaged (using platinumwires). This method requires a precise knowledgeof thermal conductivity (especially as a function oftemperature), and temperature measurements atseveral different heights within the thermal boundarylayers close to the horizontal plates to resolve thesteep gradients there. This becomes increasinglydifficult as the Rayleigh number increases and theboundary layers become thinner, with the danger ofunderestimating the heat flux. For Rayleigh numbersup to 108, a precision of 5% has been obtained (e.g.,Davaille and Jaupart, 1993).

7.03.3.3 Composition

Measurement of the time evolution of composition isrequired in studies on entrainment, mixing and two-layer convection. It usually amounts to measuring atracer dilution. Point-based techniques use eitherin situ probes (e.g., conductivity), or extraction ofsamples by suction from various points in the flowfield. Tait and Jaupart (1989) used conductivity mea-surements to study the mushy crystallization ofammonium chloride in viscous solutions. Davaille(1999) studied entrainment processes in two-layerconvection by periodic sampling of the fluid layers,measuring the salinity of each sample using thedependence of the refractive index on the salt con-centration, and a food dye concentration by a UVabsorption technique. However, these point-basedtechniques have some major drawbacks: the flowmay be disturbed by the probes, the number ofmeasurement points is very limited, and extractiontechniques can yield only time-averaged concentra-tions and cannot capture their instantaneousfluctuations.

Concentration profiles averaged over the experi-mental cell (e.g., Olson, 1984) or over one of itsdimension (e.g., Solomon and Gollub, 1988a, 1988b,1991) can be deduced from the optical absorption bythe cell of an extended white light beam (e.g., Olson1984), or a laser beam (e.g., Solomon and Gollub,1988a, 1988b, 1991).

The advent of LIF techniques in the 1970senabled simultaneous capture of the entire

instantaneous tracer (fluorescent dye) concentration

field over a planar sampling area (laser sheet), with a

experimental set up similar to Figure 14. LIF is a

nonintrusive technique which has been applied to

turbulent jet flows (e.g., Villermaux and Innocenti,

1999), laminar mixing (e.g., Ottino et al., 1988;

Fountain et al., 2000), and two-layer convection

(e.g., Kumagai et al., 2007). Since fluoresceine dye

shifts the laser light frequency, it is possible to use

LIF and TLCs to measure composition and tempera-

ture simultaneously, by recording the images with

two different filters, one for the laser frequency and

one for the fluoresceine (Figure 15; Kumagai et al.,

2007). To obtain a 3-D field, the laser beam can be

swept through the flow at high speed and images

captured with a synchronized camera.

26.3

32.5

38.9

(a)

(b)

Heaterφ = 50 mm

Figure 15 Interaction of a thermal plume with a density

stratification. The denser layer has been dyed withfluoresceine. Two-dimensional visualization when the tank

is illuminated with a laser sheet (532nm): (a) isotherms

(26.3, 32.5, and 38.9�C) and (b) compositional fields (LIFmethod). These two images were taken by a 3-CCD

camera at almost same time, but using two different

optical filters, a band-pass filter for temperature and a

cut-off filter for composition. From Kumagai I, Davaille A,and Kurita K (2007). On the fate of mantle thermal plumes

at density interface. Earth and Planetary Science Letters

254: 180–193.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 107

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 20: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

7.03.3.4 Fluid Motions

7.03.3.4.1 Local measurements

It is easy to follow the displacement of an interfacedefined by a grid (e.g., Weijermars, 1988), or byabrupt gradients either in refraction index (e.g.,visualized by shadowgraph or by interferometry) orin dye concentration. These techniques have beenused to measure the rising velocity of thermals(Griffiths, 1986) or plumes (e.g., Olson and Singer,1985; Griffiths and Campbell, 1990; Moses et al., 1993;Coulliette and Loper, 1995; Kaminski and Jaupart,2003).

‘Hot wire’ probes can also be used whereby thelocal flow velocity is measured by sensing the rate ofcooling of fine, electrically heated wires. However,their use is usually confined to turbulent or high-speed flows of low viscosity fluids. Morevover, as anintrusive method, it suffers of the same drawbacks astemperature sensors (cf. Section 7.03.3.2.1).

Laser Doppler velocimetry (LDV) allows one to mea-sure continuously in time and at a given position inspace up to the three components of the velocity oftracer particles (e.g., Adrian, 1983; Merzkirch, 2000).The method is based on the optical Doppler effect andrequires seeding of the working fluid with micro-meter-size particles. Incident light is scattered by themoving particles, and the frequency of the scatteredradiation is Doppler-shifted. Since this frequency shiftis relatively small, its detection requires the use ofmonochromatic incident laser light. Maps of the spa-tial dependence of the velocity field can be obtainedby translating the cell apparatus over the LDV system.Solomon and Gollub (1988a, 1988b, 1991) applied thistechnique to measure the velocity field in steadyquasi-2-D Rayleigh–Benard convection.

7.03.3.4.2 2D and 3D field measurements

One of the oldest techniques for measuring velocitiesin a fluid is seeding particles (e.g., hollow glass beads,aluminum flakes, and tiny air bubbles) into the fluidand illuminating a cross-section of the flow cell by athin sheet of light. The foreign particles should besmall and have densities as close to that of the fluid aspossible, in order to follow passively the local flow.

There are then several ways to describe the flow.The trajectory of a single fluid particle over timedefines a ‘pathline’. A ‘streakline’ connects all thefluid elements that have passed through a givenpoint (Figure 14(c)). ‘Streamlines’ are tangential tothe flow directions at a given time (Figure 14(e)).

In steady flow, pathlines, streaklines, and streamlinesare identical, but usually not in time-dependent flow.

The availability of high-power laser sourcestogether with fast digital processors led to the devel-opment of sophisticated whole-field velocimetrytechniques such as PIV and particle trackingvelocimetry (PTV). Both techniques provide a quan-tification of the velocity field over the entire plane.The optical setup is the same as for the visualizationof isotherms (Figure 14(a)). PTV tracks individualparticles in subsequent images, while PIV follows agroup of particles through statistical correlation oflocal windows of the image field from two sequentialimages (Adrian, 1991; Raffel et al., 1998; Merzkirch,2000). From the known time difference and the mea-sured displacement the velocity is calculated.

PTV is convenient when the seeding is sparse,and/or near boundaries, since each particle trace isanalyzed individually. The latter operation is timeconsuming. Moreover, as the particles are present atrandom locations in the fluid, the velocity estimatorsare found at random locations in the flow, too.

The PIV scheme, on the contrary, requires a highparticle density, and calculates the ‘mean’ displace-ment of particles in a small region of the image(the interrogation window) by cross-correlation ofthe transparency signal of the same window in twosubsequent images. It therefore removes the problemof identifying individual particles, which is oftenassociated with tedious operations and large errorsin the detection of particle pairs. Its spatial resolutionis uniform (function of the interrogation windowsize) over the whole image. In geodynamics, thistechnique has recently been used to study subduction(Kincaid and Griffiths, 2003, 2004) and thermalconvection (Davaille and Vatteville, 2005; Kumagaiet al., 2007).

Current research aims at combining the resolutionof PTV with the fast algorithm of PIV. Funicielloet al. (2006) recently developed such a feature track-ing (FT) method to map mantle flow duringretreating subduction.

PIV has also been used simultaneously with TLCsin two ways. When the temperature difference issmall and only one TLC slurry is needed to deter-mine a continuous temperature field, the velocity ismeasured using the same TLC particles asLagrangian flow tracers (e.g., Dabiri and Gharib,1991; Park et al., 2000; Ciofalo et al., 2003). Whenseveral TLC slurries are used to visualize isotherms,the fluid can also be seeded uniformly with 10 mmsize particles (hollow glass or latex) to calculate the

108 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 21: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

PIV (Figure 14; Davaille and Vatteville, 2005). 3-Ddetermination of the two fields is possible by scan-ning the experimental tank with the laser sheet (e.g.,Ciofalo et al., 2003). The velocity field can also beobtained in a volume by stereoscopy, whereby twocameras record the particle displacements fromdifferent angles.

7.03.3.4.3 Stress and strain rate

Stress and strain rate can be determined from thedisplacement and velocity fields measured by themethods just described; indeed, this is the most com-mon method.

However, one can also use optical ‘streaming bire-fringence’. This effect, already known to Mach (1873)and Maxwell (1873), is the property of certain liquidsto become birefringent under the action of shearforces in a flow. Such fluids consist mainly of elon-gated and deformable molecules (e.g., polymers) orcontain elongated, solid, crystal-like particles in solu-tion. At rest, these particules are randomlydistributed and the fluid is optically isotropic. Theshear forces in a flow cause the particles to align in apreferential direction, which renders the fluid aniso-tropic. This phenomenon is also well known in solids(and used in photoelasticity), and in the mantle isresponsible for seismic anisotropy. Light propagationin such a medium is directionally dependent: anincident light wave separates in the birefringentliquid into two linearly polarized componentswhose planes of polarization are perpendicular toeach other, and which propagate with differentphase velocities. Different values of the refractionindex are therefore assigned to the two components.They are out of phase when leaving the birefringentliquid, and this difference in optical path can bemeasured by interferometry.

Although theoretically most fluids should showthis effect, the best results have been obtained byusing Milling Yellow dye dissolved in aqueoussolutions (for its physico-chemical properties; seeSwanson and Green (1969) and Pindera andKrishnamurthy (1978)). Milling Yellow solutionscan be strongly non-Newtonian, depending onconcentration and temperature. One special concen-tration is particularly interesting, since its flow curveis similar to that of human blood (Schmitz andMerzkirch, 1981).

Interferometric fringes, ‘isochromates’, can thenbe obtained with a Max–Zender interferometer orwith a polariscope (Figure 16). However, a theore-tically based flow-optic relation that would allow

quantitative determination of the flow from therefraction index distribution does not yet exist.

Empirical relations concern only small values of themaximum strain rate, or small Reynolds numbers

(creeping flow). For 2-D or axisymmetric situations,a linear relationship between the refractive indexdifferences and the strain rate has been successfully

used to determine the flow in pipes of varying cross-sections (e.g., Schmitz and Merzkirch, 1981).

Horsmann and Merzkirch (1981) developed a flow-optic relationship which applies to the general 3-Dcase. More details on the technique can be found in

Merzkirch (1989).

7.03.3.5 Surface Displacement

On Earth, hot spots are usually located on top of

broad topographic swells (see Chapter 7.09).Experiments on the interaction between a rising

buoyant plume and the lithosphere, commonly pro-posed to explain hot-spot volcanism, thereforeinvolved measurement of the upper surface displace-

ment. Two techniques were used. Olson and Nam(1986) measured the amplitude of the surface topo-

graphy above the axis of a rising buoyant drop using ahigh-frequency induction coil proximity probe(Figure 17(a)). They were able to follow the tem-

poral evolution of the surface elevation with asensitivity of 0.02 mm. Using a Michelson interfe-

rometer, Griffiths et al. (1989) could reconstructfrom the fringe pattern both the shape and width ofthe swell, in addition to its height (Figure 17(b)).

Fringes in the interferogram are topographic con-tours with a vertical distance apart of half the laserwavelength (i.e., 0.633 mm for a He–Ne laser). The

surface height at any position of the swell is thereforegiven by the number of fringes.

Lightsource

Polarizer θ Polarizer Φ

Flow cellLens Lens

Lens

Recordingplane

Figure 16 Streaming birefringence. Polariscope setup.From Merzkirch W (1989) Streaming birefringence. In: Yang

W-J (ed.) Handbook of Flow Visualization, pp. 177–180.

Taylor and Francis.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 109

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 22: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

7.03.4 Rayleigh–Taylor Instabilities

Whenever light fluid underlies a heavier fluid in afield of gravity, the interface between them is inher-ently unstable to small perturbations (Figure 1(a)).This is the classic form of the so-called Rayleigh–Taylor instability (hereafter RTI), first studiedtheoretically by Rayleigh (1883) and later by Taylor(1950) (see Chapter 7.04). RTIs have been used tomodel a number of geophysical processes, includingthe formation and distribution of salt domes (e.g.,Nettleton, 1934; Selig, 1965; Biot and Ode, 1965;Ribe, 1998), the emplacement of gneissic domes andgranitic batholiths (Fletcher, 1972), instability ofcontinental lithosphere beneath mountain belts(Houseman and Molnar, 1997), subduction of oceaniclithosphere (Canright and Morris, 1993), the tem-poral and spatial periodicity of volcanic activity in avariety of geological settings, namely island arcs(Marsh and Carmichael, 1974; Fedotov, 1975;Marsh, 1979; Kerr and Lister, 1988), continental rifts(Mohr and Wood, 1976; Bonatti, 1985; Ramberg andSjostrom, 1973), Iceland (Sigurdsson and Sparks,1978), and mid-ocean ridges (Whitehead et al., 1984;Shouten et al., 1985; Crane, 1985; Whitehead, 1986;Kerr and Lister, 1988), segregation and mixing in theearly history of Earth’s core and mantle (Jellinek et al.,1999), and the initiation of instabilities deep in themantle (Ramberg, 1972; Whitehead and Luther, 1975;Stacey and Loper, 1983; Loper and Eltayeb, 1986;Ribe and de Valpine, 1994; Kelly and Bercovici,1997; Bercovici and Kelly, 1997).

Laboratory experiments have proved to be power-ful tools for studying the development andmorphology of RTI. We focus here on the case

where the density field is nondiffusing, and the fluidshighly viscous, so that the effects of compositionaldiffusion, inertia, and surface tension, can beneglected. Then, the nature of overturning onlydepends on the geometry of the boundaries, the visc-osities, and densities of the fluids and the layer depths.A large number of experimental studies using a vari-ety of materials have been performed. For theexperiments using the most viscous fluids (e.g., sili-cone putties), the effective gravity was enhanced up to800g by spinning in a centrifuge (e.g., Ramberg, 1967,1968; Jackson and Talbot, 1989). Early experimentswith putty and other non-Newtonian fluids have beenextensively photographed and compared with geolo-gical formations (esp. salt domes) by Nettleton (1934,1943), Parker and McDowell (1955), and Ramberg(1967, 1972). However, there was no intercomparisonbetween these laboratory experiments and theory dueto the unknown rheology of the laboratory materials.We shall restrict the discussion below to experimentswith Newtonian fluids, easier to control.

Whitehead and Luther (1975) performed experi-ments under normal gravity and showed that themorphology of the rising pockets of light fluiddepends on the viscosity ratio between the two fluids:more viscous instabilities develop in finger-like‘diapirs’, while less viscous instabilities develop intomushroom-shaped ‘cavity plume’ (Figure 18). Thelatter case is of particular interest for the initiation ofinstabilities deep in the mantle since hot mantlematerial is probably also less viscous (e.g., Staceyand Loper, 1983). The characteristic spacing � andgrowth rate � of RTI strongly depend on the viscos-ity of the materials (Selig, 1965; Whitehead andLuther, 1975; Canright and Morris, 1993; Bercovici

Proximity probe

Foil target

Cold jacket

Swell

Plume

U

(a)

(b)

η(z)T(z)

(c)

Figure 17 Measurements of surface displacements above a rising drop. (a) Proximity probe. (b) Side view of the rising drop.(c) Holographic interferometry on the free surface. The center of the interference fringes corresponds to the surface highest

point and is centered on the drop vertical axis. (a) Adapted from Olson and Nam (1986). (c) From Griffths RW, Gurnis M, and

Eitelberg G (1989) Holographic measurements of surface topography in laboratory models of mantle hotspots. Geophysical

Journal 96: 1–19.

110 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 23: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

and Kelly, 1997; Ribe, 1998), as well as on the geo-metry of their source (Kerr and Lister, 1988; Listerand Kerr, 1989; Wilcock and Whitehead, 1991). For athin denser lower layer of thickness hd and viscosity�d underlying an infinite layer of viscosity �m, theyscale as:

� � hd F ð Þ ½5a�

and

� ��ghd

��GðÞ ½5b�

where g is the gravity acceleration, ¼ vd/vm andv¼max(�d, �m). Equation [5b] shows that theinstability growth rate is limited by the fluid withthe larger viscosity. The functions F and G depend onthe viscosity ratio and the geometry of the system.For a thin plane more viscous layer, linear stabilityanalysis shows that F()� 1/5 and G()� 1, whilefor a thin plane less viscous layer, F()� �1/3 andG()� 1/3 (Whitehead and Luther, 1975; Selig,

1965). Laboratory measurements agree with thesescalings (Figure 19), which also confirms the abilityof the linearized equations to predict the dominantwavelength of the developed instability (Whiteheadand Luther, 1975). However, for instabilities devel-oping from a cylinder in a denser fluid, the RTIspacing and growth rate still depend on the cylindersize but are independent of the viscosity ratio(Figure 19; Kerr and Lister, 1988; Lister and Kerr,1989). For a thin layer of light fluid embedded indenser fluid, linear stability again predicts a fastestgrowing wavelength much greater than the thicknessof the low-viscosity layer, which agrees with theexperimental results (Figure 19; Lister and Kerr,1989; Wilcock and Whitehead, 1991). Moreover, thedisplacement of the lower interface can reach a sig-nificant fraction of that of the upper interface. Thisleads to entrainment of the substratum into the lightdiapir (Ramberg, 1972; Wilcock and Whitehead,1991). For very thin layers, a second instability isalso observed at a scale much greater than the

(b)(a)

0:26:09

0:35:18

0:49:25

Figure 18 Development of Rayleigh–Taylor instabilities. (a) Fingers develop when the instabilities are more viscous thanthe ambient fluid; (b) cavity plumes when the instabilities are less viscous. (a) From Whitehead JA and Luther DS (1975)

Dynamics of laboratory diapir and plume models. Journal of Geophysical Research 80: 705–717. (b) From Bercovici D and

Kelly A (1997). Nonlinear initiation of diapirs and plume heads. Physics of the Earth and Planetary Interiors 101: 119–130.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 111

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 24: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

characteristic wavelength; it arises from perturba-tions predominantly involving thickening ratherthan translation of the buoyant layer (Wilcock andWhitehead, 1991).

Bercovici and Kelly (1997) described both theore-tically and experimentally the evolution of theinterface from the initial linear instability to the for-mation and lift-off of cavity plumes. This involvesnonlinear feedback mechanisms between the growthof the instability and the draining of the low-viscositychannel, whereby the proto-plume can stall for a longperiod of time before it separates and begins itsascent. The radius of the cavity plume a and itstrailing conduit R now scale as

a � hd– 2=9 and R � hd ½6�

which shows that the radius of the head will besignificantly larger than the conduit radius.

After RTI lift-off, the plumes may not alwayscontinue to rise along a vertical line as solitarybodies. Depending on their relative size, and thevertical and horizontal separation between them,they can become attracted to one another, clustering

and even coalescing (Kelly and Bercovici, 1997).Combining theoretical, numerical, and laboratoryresults, Manga (1997) further showed that attractionbetween plumes was enhanced by plumes’ ability todeform (see Chapter 7.04).

Once the instabilities have started, the light fluidwill gather at the top of the box, where it will remainsince the density configuration is now stable. Aninitially unstable compositional stratification willtherefore go unstable only once. In that respect, theRayleigh–Taylor instability appears as an essentialprocess of segregation of two intermingled materials.

But the ‘one-shot’ character of RTI can be alteredwhen the lighter fluid is continuously released fromthe bottom through a diffusive interface (Loper et al.,1988; Jellinek et al., 1999) or through melting (Jellineket al., 1999). By introducing a silk membrane on theinterface between a thin water layer and a heavyviscous corn syrup layer, Loper and McCartney(1986) and Loper et al., (1988) observed intermittentRTI generation. When the lighter fluid is lessviscous, the RTI morphology is 3-D as alreadydescribed, whereby it is sheetlike when the lighterfluid is more viscous (Jellinek et al., 1999). Moreover,for high release flux (or high Reynolds number), theRTI can entrain on its way up a significant amount ofthe ambient denser fluid, and the final stratification issignificantly altered by mixing compared to theinitial stage (Jellinek et al., 1999).

More commonly, episodicity can be sustainedindefinitely when the density field is diffusing. Thisis the case in thermal convection, to which we turnnow.

7.03.5 Simple Rayleigh–BenardConvection Studies

In buoyancy-driven flows, the exact governing equa-tions are intractable. Some approximation is needed,and the simplest one which admits buoyancy is theOberbeck–Boussinesq approximation (see Chapter7.02). It assumes that

1. In the equations for the rate of change of momen-tum and mass, density variations may be neglectedexcept when they are coupled to the gravitationalacceleration in the buoyancy force. In practice, itrequires ��T << 1.

2. All other fluid properties can be considered asconstant over the experimental cell.

3. Viscous dissipation is negligible.

1

λ /h d

10

10

1/γ102

102

103 104 105

Figure 19 RTI wavelength normalized by the thin layer

depth as the inverse of the viscosity ratio. The dashed line

represents the infinite plane layer solution l/hd� �1/3

(eqn [5a]). Dots are experimental data for a thin layerembedded in more viscous fluid; the dotted line connects

observations from an experiment exhibiting a bimodal

wavelength instability; characteristic wavelengths predicted

by the numerical model are shown in dot-dashed and thinsolid lines (Wilcock and Whitehead, 1991). Stars represent

observations for a cylinder and the thick solid line shows the

theoretical prediction (Kerr and Lister, 1988).

112 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 25: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

In this section, we focus on cases where theOberbeck–Boussinesq approximation is valid. Sincemantle material has a high Pr, emphasis will be onresults using high Pr fluids. The convective flowshave usually been determined using planformsvisualized by shadowgraph, heat flow measurements,or time series of temperature measurements withinthe experimental cell.

7.03.5.1 Convection at Relatively LowRa(Rac�Ra�106)

As predicted by linear stability theory (Rayleigh, 1916;Chandrasekhar, 1961), convection should set in abovea critical value Rac, which depends on the boundaryconditions (see Chapter 7.04). Figure 20 shows aregime diagram of thermal convection as a functionof Rayleigh and Prandtl numbers when both the topand bottom boundaries are rigid (zero velocity on theboundary) and isothermal. Rayleigh–Benard convec-tion exhibits a sequence of transitions toward chaos asRa increases. These transitions can also be seen on themeasurements of the heat flow QS extracted by thesystem (Figure 21), compared to the conductive heatflux k�T/H. Their ratio defines the Nusselt number

Nu ¼ QS

k:�T=H½7�

It is equal to unity for conduction and exceeds unityas soon as convection starts. It was by measuring QS asa function of �T that Schmidt and Silverton (1935)determined experimentally for the first time the cri-tical Rayleigh number for the onset of convection.They confirmed the predicted theoretical value of1708 with an accuracy better than 10%. Amongothers, Silveston (1958) extended the measurementsto a wider range of fluids (Figure 21) and showedthat, as predicted, the value of Rac does not depend onPr. However, this is not the case for the subsequenttransitions between patterns at higher Ra (Figure 20),for which there is a clear difference between low Pr

fluids (e.g., water, air, mercury, compressed gases likehelium) and fluids with Pr� 100.

For Pr� 60, laboratory experiments performedwith silicone oils revealed the following sequence of

patterns in the convective planform as Ra increases

(Busse and Whitehead, 1971; Krishnamurti, 1970a,

1970b; Richter and Parsons, 1975): 2-D rolls

(Figure 22(a)) are stable only for Rayleigh numbers

less than 13 times critical. For Ra greater than this, a

second set of rolls perpendicular to the original ones

grows, and the new planform is rectangular. In this

so-called ‘bimodal’ regime (Figure 22(b)), the

upwellings assume the geometry of two adjacent

sides of a square, while the downwellings form the

Prandtl number10–2 102 104

104

106

108

1061

Ray

leig

h nu

mbe

r

No motionSteady 2D

Steady 3D

Plumes + cells

Time-dependent 3D

Plumes

Large-scale circulation+ Plumes

Silicone oils, syrupsGlycerol

WaterHelium

AirMercury

Turbulentflow

Figure 20 Regimes diagram of thermal convection. Data compiled from Krishnamurti (1970a, 1970b, 1979), Whitehead and

Parsons (1978), Nataf et al. (1984), Guillou and Jaupart (1995), Zhang et al. (1997), Manga and Weeraratne (1999), and Xi

et al. (2004). The square bars show the range of experiments performed. The experiments performed with a viscositycontrast within the tank greater than 10 are enclosed in the dotted line. The three round dots show experiments in

centrifuge by Nataf et al. (1982).

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 113

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 26: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

other two sides of the square. At Ra about 100 timescritical, a new planform develops through a collectiveinstability: the corners of the bimodal rectangles join,and the resulting planform is time dependent andresembles spokes radiating out of the central upwel-lings or downwellings (multimodal regime,Figure 22(c)). The two transitions in patterns arecorrelated with kinks in the Nu-Ra curves (e.g.,Malkus, 1954; Willis and Deardorff, 1967;Krishnamurti, 1970a, 1970b), and the Ra value ateach transition does not vary systematically with Pr

(Busse and Whitehead, 1971; Krishnamurti, 1970a,1970b). However, the transition toward the time-dependent spoke pattern is not sharp, but there is adomain in Ra where both time-dependent and stablecells can coexist. Hence, the pattern will dependstrongly on the initial conditions. Under controlledinitial conditions, Whitehead and Parsons (1978)observed stationary bimodal convection up toRa¼ 7.6� 105, but an oscillating spoke pattern ifstarting from random conditions. At Pr¼ 106 (usinga centrifuge), Nataf et al., (1984) observed steadymotions at Ra¼ 0.95� 105, but time-dependentinstabilities at Ra¼ 6.3� 105. When the Oberbeck–Boussineq approximation applies, cold and hotcurrents have symmetric characteristics, even fortime-dependent spokes. The horizontally averagedthermal structure is symmetric relative to the tem-perature at the mean depth (Figure 23).

For intermediate and low Pr, the pattern for aBoussinesq fluid always consists of straight rollsabove but close to onset. However, the bifurcation

toward stationary bimodal flow is replaced by anoscillatory secondary instability (e.g., Busse, 1978,1989), and quite rapidly by chaos, then turbulence,as Ra increases further (Figure 21).

Hardturbulence

Softturbulence

No

mot

ion

Ste

ady

conv

ectio

n

Osc

illat

ions

Cha

osTr

ansi

tion

103 105 107 109 1011

103

102

10

1

1000 1500 2000 3000

0.9

1.0

1.2

1.5

Rayleigh number

Nus

selt

num

ber

Figure 21 Nusselt number as a function of Rayleigh

number mesured in He. The different transitions observed

are indicated. Adapted from Heslot F, Castaing B, and

Libchaber A (1987). Transitions to turbulence in helium gas.Physical Review A 36: 5870–5873. The inset shows the data

from Silveston (1958) around the convection onset.

(a)

(c)

(b)

Figure 22 Shadowgraphs of the different stable cellularpatterns in isoviscous convection at high Pr: (a) rolls,

Ra¼20�103; (b) bimodal, Ra¼64�103 Instabilities of

convection rolls in high Prandtl number fluid. Journal of Fluid

Mechanics 47: 305–320); (c) spoke, Ra¼ 1.4�105. (a) FromBusse FH and Whitehead JA (1971) Instabilities of convection

rolls in high Prandtl number fluid. Journal of Fluid Mechanics

47: 305–320 and (c) From Richter FM and Parsons B (1975).On the interaction of two scales of convection in the mantle.

Journal of Geophysical Research 80: 2529–2541.

114 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 27: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

7.03.5.2 Patterns and Defects

The study of convection planforms and pattern selec-tion is a very rich and fundamental field in itself, andhas motivated a large body of theoretical (see Chapter7.04) and experimental work. Recent reviews on thesubject include papers by Busse (1978, 1989),Geitling (1998), Bodenschatz et al. (2000), andAhlers (2005). Experiments are usually done in thinfluid layers with large aspect ratios (up to 100), andvisualized by shadowgraph. We will mention hereonly a few striking results.

7.03.5.2.1 Generation of an initial

prescribed pattern

To determine the domain of stability of the differentpatterns and follow the formation and evolution ofthe defects, the convective pattern must be initiatedin a well-controlled way. The method developed byChen and Whitehead (1968) consists in placing a gridmade up of alternating blocked and clear areas overthe top transparent channel. A 300–500 W incandes-cent lamp then is shone down through the pattern, sothat the fluid lying below is slightly radiativelyheated in the desired pattern. After a certain time(�1 h), the temperature of the top bath is decreasedand the temperature of the bottom bath increased atequal rates (typically 2�min�1) until the desiredRayleigh number is reached. It is important to changethe baths at the same rates in order to exclude asym-metric or hexagonal modes of flow. Convection thenstarts with the location of the rising limbs of the cellsbeing controlled by the places which were heated.

7.03.5.2.2 Patterns for Pr�100

Chen and Whitehead (1968) and Busse andWhitehead (1971) studied experimentally the stabi-lity of rolls for a silicone oil with Pr¼ 100. Rolls ofknown aspect ratio (roll width over tank thickness)were initiated, and allowed to evolve. The resultswere compared with the theory of Busse (1967a)which predicts a balloon-shaped region of stablerolls (Figure 24). The zigzag instability(Figure 25(a)) occurs when the aspect ratio is greaterthan 1 and tends to reduce it to 1. The cross-rollinstability (Figure 25(b)) occurs when the aspectratio is much less than 1, or when the Rayleighnumber exceeds about 2� 104: the initial rolls arereplaced by two sets of rolls with different wave-length at right angles to each other. The patternthen evolves toward one set of rolls with increasedaspect ratio (in the first case) or to the bimodal mode(in the second case). When two sets of rolls of

2103

104

3Wave number

Ray

leig

h nu

mbe

r

4

Figure 24 Domain of stability of rolls as a function of the

wave number and the Rayleigh number (‘Busse’s balloon’).

Solid lines are the theoretical predictions (Busse, 1967a).Experimental results by Busse and Whitehead (1971): (o),

stable rolls; (x), zigzag instability; (þ), cross-roll instability

leading to rolls; (þþ), cross-roll instability leading to bimodal

convection; (þþþ), cross-roll instability inducing transient rollswith subsequent local processes. From Busse FH and

Whitehead JA (1971). Instabilities of convection rolls in high

Prandtl number fluid. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 47: 305–320.

1

0.5 +

00.5 1

Temperature

Dep

th

Figure 23 Nondimensional temperature as a function ofdepth. (o), Silicone oil, ¼3, Ra¼2.16�105; L-100, ¼22,

Ra¼ 1.36�105; L-100, ¼ 750, Ra¼4.95�105. In all but the

last case, data near the boundaries have been omitted.

From Richter FM, Nataf H-C., and Daly SF (1983). Heattransfer and horizontally averaged temperature of

convection with large viscosity variations. Journal of Fluid

Mechanics 129: 173–192.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 115

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 28: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

different wavelengths are combined, local rearrange-ment occurs through the pinching instability(Figure 25(c)). The agreement between the experi-mental results and the theory is quite remarkable(Figure 24; see also Chapter 7.04).

7.03.5.2.3 Patterns for Pr < 100

Patterns and defects have been extensively studiedmore recently, using primarily compressed gases asthe working fluid (small cell sizes can be used and Pr

can be tuned between 0.17 and 30), sensitive shadow-graph visualization coupled to digital image analysis,and quantitative heat flow measurements (for a review,see Bodenschatz et al. (2000)). Figure 25 shows exam-ples of the patterns observed. Above but close to onset,the pattern for a Boussinesq fluid always consists ofstraight rolls, possibly with some defects induced bythe sidewalls. At Pr� 1, the skewed-varicose instabil-ity arises to transform rolls into rolls of largerwavelength (Figure 25(d)). When non-Boussinesqconditions prevail, hexagons develop instead of rolls(Figure 25(e)). Further above onset, spiral-defectchaos (Morris et al., 1993) occurs in systems with Pr

of order 1 or less (Figure 25(f )). This state is a bulkproperty and is not induced by side-walls. On theother hand, spirals occur in circular cells (Figure 25).

7.03.5.3 Thermal Convection at HighRayleigh Numbers(105�Ra)

At high Ra, the convective pattern becomes disorga-nized and flow is generated locally by thermalboundary layer (TBL) instabilities (Elder, 1968),which develop into plumes (Figures 7 and 8). Theirthermal anomalies are easily recorded by thermo-couples located within the fluid (e.g., Townsend,1957; Deardorff et al., 1969; Sparrow et al., 1970;Castaing et al., 1989; Davaille and Jaupart, 1993;Weeraratne and Manga, 1998; Lithgow-Bertelloniet al., 2001; Figure 28).

7.03.5.3.1 Thermal boundary layer

instabilities

Plume generation in fully developed convection is acyclic process in which the TBLs grow by thermaldiffusion, become unstable when they reach a critical

(a) (b) (c)

(d)

(f)

3

42

1

(e)

Figure 25 Patterns and defects. (a) Zig-zag, (b) cross-roll, (c) pinching instabilities, (d) skewed-varicose instability;

(e) coexisting up- and downflow hexagons together with rolls; (f) two-armed spiral patterns in cells 1 and 4. Spiral defect

chaos in cell 2. (a, b, c) From Busse FH and Whitehead JA (1971). Instabilities of convection rolls in high Prandtl number fluid.Journal of Fluid Mechanics 47: 305–320; (d) From Plapp BB (1997) Spatial-Pattern Formation in Rayleigh–Benard Convection.

PhD Thesis, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York; (e) Assenheimer M, Steinberg V (1996) Observation of coexisting upflow

and downflow hexagons in Boussinesq Rayleigh–Benard convection. Physical Review Letters 76: 756–759; (f) from Plapp BB,Egolf DA, Bodenschatz E, and Pesch W (1998). Dynamics and selection of giant spirals in Rayleigh-Benrad convection.

Physical Review Letters 81: 5334–5337.

116 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 29: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

thickness c such that Ra(�T,&)¼ Rac, and then

empty themselves rapidly into plumes, at which

point the cycle begins again (Figure 26). The char-

acteristic timescale �c for this process is the time

required for the growing TBL to become unstable,

and is (Howard, 1964)

�c ¼H 2

��

Rac

RaðH ; �TÞ

� �2=3

½8�

Because Ra � H 3 (eqn [1]), � c is independent ofthe layer depth H: the two TBLs do not interact

anymore. This phenomenological model (Howard,

1964) and the scaling [8] is confirmed by laboratory

experiments (Figures 26 and 27; e.g., Sparrow et al.,

1970; Davaille and Jaupart, 1993; Davaille, 1999a;

Manga et al., 2001; Davaille and Vatteville, 2005).

Experiments further show that the typical spacing

between plumes is 3–6 times c (e.g., Sparrow et al.,

1970; Tamai and Asaeda, 1984; Asaeda and

Watanabe, 1989; Davaille et al., 2002; Jellinek and

Manga, 2004). Moreover, the plumes seem connected

by a network of ‘ridges’ near the base of the layer

(Tamai and Asaeda, 1984; Asaeda and Watanabe,

1989). This morphology was confirmed by detailed

numerical studies (e.g., Houseman, 1990; Christensen

and Harder, 1991; Tackley, 1998; Trompert and

Hansen, 1998a; Parmentier and Sotin, 2000). Plumes

have a head-and-stem structure, and both head

and stem diameters decrease with increasing

Ra (Lithgow-Bertelloni et al., 2001). Plumes can

eventually detach from the TBL once they have

drained it (Figure 26). They are transient features

with a lifetime comparable to � c (Davaille and

Vatteville, 2005). Since the two TBLs do not interact,

the global heat flow should not depend on H

anymore, implying

Nu � Ra1=3 ½9�

This scaling was verified by Globe and Dropkin(1959) and Guillou and Jaupart (1995) using silicone

oils for Ra up to Ra� 2� 107. Goldstein et al., (1990),

who employed an electrochemical analog to

(a)

(e) (f) (g) (h)

(b) (c) (d)

24.6°

40.5°

31.4°

24.6°

31.4°

31.4°

40.5°

40.5°

31.4°24.6°

3

2

Vel

ocity

(m

m s

–1)

1

0

24.6°

31.4°24.6°

Figure 26 Thermal boundary layer instabilities in a layer of sugar syrup, initially at 21�C and suddenly heated from below at

53�C (Ra¼1.7�106). (a) Negative of the picture taken at t¼ 300 s. The isotherms appear as white lines. The TBL is growing

by conduction from the lower boundary. (b) t¼ 400 s. The TBL becomes unstable. (c) t¼ 460 s. A thermal plume, outlined bythe 24.6�C isotherm, rises from the TBL, and the TBL begins to shrink. (d) Corresponding velocity field deduced from PIV. The

color background represents the velocity magnitude. (e) t¼500 s. The plume is well developed and the TBL is emptying itself

in it. (f) Corresponding velocity field. (g) t¼600 s. The plume head has reached the upper boundary and begins to spreadunder it. The TBL has nearly disappeared and the conduit is disconnected from its source. (h) Corresponding velocity field.

From Davaille A and Vatteville J (2005). On the transient nature of mantle plumes. Geophysical Research Letters 32,

doi:10.1029/2005GL023029.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 117

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 30: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

convection to reach Ra� 1012with Pr¼ 2750, recov-ered also (9). This regime of plumes has sometimesbeen named ‘soft turbulence’.

7.03.5.3.2 Soft and hard turbulence at

low Pr

Steady-state experiments by Heslot et al. (1987) andCastaing et al. (1989) in helium (0.6� Pr� 1.7) indi-cated that the spectrum of temperature fluctuationschanges above Ra¼ 4� 107, defining a new dynami-cal regime called ‘hard turbulence’. This transition isalso seen on the Nu–Ra relationship (Figure 21),which follows the 1/3 power law [9] forRa¼ 4� 107 (the ‘soft turbulence’ regime), butchanges to a 2/7 power law for Ra� 4� 107. On theother hand, Katsaros et al. (1977) recovered the 1/3power law [9] for Ra up to109 during the transientcooling from above of a water tank. Castaing et al.

(1989) suggested that, in steady state, the dynamics ofboundary layer instabilities were affected by theestablishement of a large-scale circulation over thewhole tank. Since the experiments were done in acontainer with aspect ratio 1, the large-scale circula-tion could have been caused by the wall effects.However, the establishment of a large-scale circula-tion had already been observed by Krishnamurti andHoward (1981) for larger aspect ratio. Since theseexperiments, much theoretical and experimental

work has been done to confirm or disprove, extend,and explain the new regime (for recent reviews, seeSiggia (1994), Grossmann and Lohse, (2000);Chavanne et al. (2001)). It was found that a large-scale forced flow can decrease the convective heatflow (Solomon and Gollub, 1991). For aspect ratiossmaller than 1, several regimes seem to coexist, dueto the geometry of the large-scale circulation whichcan switch from one cell to several superimposedcells (e.g., Chilla et al., 2004). In the search for theultimate turbulent regime, Ra� 1017 has now beenobtained using cryogenic He (Niemela et al., 2000).However, from 106 to 1017, these authors foundneither a 2/7 nor a 1/3 power law, but a 0.30 power-law. Following Kraichman (1962), Grossmann andLohse (2000) proposed a systematic theory to predictall the different asymptotic regimes as a function ofRa and Pr. To be able to compare accurately theoryand experiments, special care is now taken toestimate heat losses from the sides (e.g., Alhers,2001) and from the finite conductivity of thebottom and top plates (e.g., Brown et al., 2005; seeSection 7.03.2.3), as well as the Pr variations.However, it seems that the ‘ultimate’ regim has notbeen found yet.

7.03.5.3.3 Large-scale (cellular)circulation and plumes at high Pr

To obtain high Rayleigh number in high Pr

fluids requires large temperature differences(typically� 20�C) and large depths (typically� 20–30 cm). The aspect ratios of these experimentsare therefore small (between 1 and 3 at most). Evenfor fluids with very weak temperature dependence ofviscosity (e.g., silicone oils), the viscosity can nolonger be treated as constant (Figures 2 and 20). Itsvalue is therefore taken at the mean of the boundarytemperatures, (TbotþTtop)/2.

Weeraratne and Manga (1998), Manga andWeraratne (1999), and Manga et al., (2001) deter-mined the different styles of time-dependentconvection from temperatures recorded on the tankmid-plane (Figure 28). For steady flow (Ra� 105),these remain constant. When the flow first becomesunsteady, temperature fluctuations with large ampli-tude and long period appear (Figure 28(a)). As Ra

increases, the amplitude of long-period fluctuationsdecreases and small short-period fluctuations appear(e.g., Ra� 5� 106, Figure 28(b)). At still higher Ra,the large-amplitude fluctuations disappear comple-tely and only the short-period fluctuations remain(Figure 28(c)). As mushroom-shaped plumes were

106

10–3

Per

oid

10–2

107

Ra

–2/3

Best slope-0.61

Aspect ratio 2Aspect ratio 1

108

Figure 27 Periodicity of the TBL instabilities as a functionof Rayleigh number. The solid line represents Howard’s

scaling in Ra�2/3. From Manga M and Weeraratne D (1999).

Experimental study of non-Boussinesq Rayleigh–Benard

convection at high Rayleigh and Prandtl numbers. Physicsof Fluids 10: 2969–2976.

118 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 31: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

observed in this regime, the small-scale fluctuationswere interpreted as their signature, and the long-period signal as the signature of large-scale (cellular)flow. From Ra� 107 to 2� 108, no large-scale circu-lation was observed. Such circulation was also absent

from transient experiments where the fluid was con-tinusouly heated from below (Lithgow-Bertelloniet al., 2001) or cooled from above (Davaille andJaupart, 1993), and the other boundaries were insu-lated. Using glycerol (Zhang et al., 1997, 1998) anddipropylene glycol (Xi et al., 2004) in aspect ratio 1

cells, a different picture was found for Ra� 108–109: alarge-scale circulation develops which entrains theplumes as soon as they have formed. Measuring thevelocity field by PIV, Xi et al. (2004) demonstratedthat the flow becomes organized because of the

plumes, which interact through their velocity bound-ary layers typically as soon as they have risen adistance comparable to their spacing: plume cluster-ing then occurs, as in Rayleigh–Taylor instabilities(Bercovici and Kelly, 1997) and in experiments onthe interaction between two thermal plumes (Moses

et al., 1993). In this regime where plumes and large-scale circulation coexist, the exponent of the Nu–Ra

power law becomes again closer to 2/7 (Xi et al.,2004). It would now be interesting to run the sameexperiments with larger aspect ratio to determine ifthe large-scale circulation always spans the wholetank, or if it has its own wavelength.

7.03.5.4 Convective Regime in anIsoviscous Mantle

From Figure 20 and eqn [1], one can determine theconvective regime of a mantle layer as a function ofits thickness and average viscosity (Figure 29).Plumes will develop in the upper mantle (of thick-ness 660 km) only if its viscosity is lower than1021 Pa s. For an average mantle viscosity of1022 Pa s, plumes will be generated only if the mantlelayer thickness exceeds 2000 km. Convective motionsoriginating at the CMB and developing over thewhole mantle thickness should therefore take theform of plumes (Parmentier et al., 1975; Loper andStacey, 1983). However, those plumes are transientphenomena. According to eqn [8], �c� 10 My, 40 Myand 200 My for dynamic viscosities �m¼ 1019 Pa s,5� 1020 Pa s, and 1022 Pa s, respectively. Such recur-rence times are probably also upper bounds on plumelifetime. The corresponding values of the criticalTBL thickness c�H(Rac/Ra)1/3 for the same visc-osities are 31, 62, and 140 km, respectively, which

0.7

0.5

0.3

0.7

0.6

0.7

0.6

0

0

0

0.01

0.01 0.02 0.03Dimensionless time, tκ /d2

Ra = 5.5 × 107

Ra = 4.7 × 106

Ra = 2.7 × 105

(a)

(b)

(c)

θm

0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05

0.04 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.20

Figure 28 Temperature fluctuations m¼ (T�Ttop)/�T atthree thermocouples located at mid-height in a tank of

convecting corn syrup. Time is normalized by the diffusive

timescale d2/k. (a) Unsteady convection dominated bylarge-scale flow (Ra¼2.5�105). (b) Increased plume

activity along with large-scale flow (Ra¼ 4.7� 106).

(c) Plume dominated convection with short period

fluctuations (Ra¼ 5.5� 107). From Weeraratne D andManga M (1998) Transitions in the style of mantle

convection at high Rayleigh numbers. Earth and Planetary

Science Letters 160: 563–568.

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 30001014

1018

1022

1026

Depth (km)

Vis

cosi

ty (

Pa

s)

Plumes

No convection

Cellular

Figure 29 Convective regime developing in a mantle layeras a function of its thickness and viscosity. The pattern is

cellular for Ra�Rac¼650, and in plumes for Ra�106. In

gray the average viscosity inferred for the whole mantle(Kolhstedt, volume 2). The thin gray line delimits the upper

mantle. The calculation has been done from eqn [1] taking

�¼10�6 m2 s�1, �¼ 2� 10�5 K�1 and �T¼ 3000 K.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 119

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 32: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

implies a plume spacing 100–840 km in the mantle.Given the 2900 km thickness of the mantle, plumeclustering could occur (e.g., Schubert et al., 2004).Moreover, from Figure 26, we expect that a plumewill eventually detach from the hot TBL from whichit originated. This implies that the absence of a plumeconduit in a tomographic image need not indicate theabsence of a plume.

However, if isoviscous convection predictsplumes, it does not predict plates, which are themain signature of convection on the Earth’s surface(e.g., Chapters 7.01 and 7.02). Part of the difficulty indetermining the convective pattern in the mantleresides in the complexity of mantle rheology, whichdepends on temperature (strongly), pressure, partialmelting (strongly), water content (strongly), chemis-try and strain rate (see Chapter 2.14). The rheology ofthe lithosphere is especially difficult to quantify sinceit comprises a brittle skin as well as a viscous lowerpart. The convective pattern driven by the ‘cold’upper-mantle boundary appears to be cellular,although time dependent. Inverting Figure 29 forthis regime, it would therefore indicate an ‘effective’mantle viscosity greater than 1023 Pa s, that is, muchlower than the viscosity of the cold lithosphere, but atleast an order of magnitude higher than the measuredbulk mantle viscosity. This asymmetry in mantleconvection could be caused by its mixed heatingmode (internal and bottom heating), and by its rheol-ogy, in particular the temperature dependence ofviscosity. We now turn to the experiments whichhave been devoted to these two effects.

7.03.6 Temperature-DependentViscosity

A strong temperature dependence of the viscositybreaks the symmetry in the convection cell: coldinstabilities are now more viscous than the fluid inthe bulk of the tank, while the hot instabilities are lessviscous. According to what has been observed in RTI(Section 7.03.4, Figure 18), their morphology shouldchange. Figure 30 shows that this is indeed the case:hot TBL instabilities are mushroom shaped, whilecold instabilities become diapirs, which can fold onthe bottom plate before spreading (Figure 30(b)).Material in the cold TBL also flows less easily andrapidly than in the rest of the fluid, which will dimin-ish the efficiency of convection and the heattransport. The system is now characterized by Ra

(based on the viscosity at the mean of the boundarytemperatures), Pr, and the viscosity ratio¼ �(Ttop)/�(Tbot)

7.03.6.1 Rigid Boundaries

7.03.6.1.1 Onset of convection

Stengel et al., (1982) studied theoretically and experi-mentally the onset of convection for � 3 400. Rac

remains constant at low , increases at moderate toa maximum for � 3000, and then decreases.According to Stengel et al. (1982), this occurs becauseconvection begins first in a (hotter) less viscous sub-layer where the local Rayleigh number is maximum.Richter et al. (1983) increased the range of viscosityratio to 105, and found similar results. Moreover,finite-amplitude disturbances are seen to grow atRayleigh numbers below critical, as predicted byBusse (1967b) for fluids with weakly temperature-dependent viscosity.

7.03.6.1.2 Patterns and regimes

Richter (1978) explored the stability of rolls, usingglycerine and L100 (polybutene), for Ra� 25� 103

and � 20. For large , hexagons were found to bethe stable pattern. White (1988) used Golden Syrup

Figure 30 Thermal convection in a strongly temperature-dependent viscosity fluid (glucose syrup) cooled from above

and heated from below. The black lines are the isotherms

(A: 10.5�C; B: 31.4�C; C: 24.6�C; D: 40.5�C. (a) Hot and coldTBL instabilities (Ra¼4.7�106; ¼116). (b) Cold TBL for

sugar syrup cooled from above only (Ra¼ 1.2� 107;

¼1580).

120 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 33: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

to study the stability of patterns for � 1000 and

Ra� 63� 103 (Figure 31). Besides rolls and hexa-gons, a new planform of squares (Figure 31(b)) was

found to be stable at large viscosity variations, and

pattern instabilities developed in a mosaic form(Figure 31(e) and 31(f)). At fixed wave number,

rolls are always unstable as soon as > 40.

Moreover, squares break down to a spoke patternaround Ra¼ 20 000, that is much sooner than in the

constant viscosity case (transition at Ra� 105). The

wavelength of squares is also observed to decreasewith increasing . Temperature profiles through the

105(a)

(b)

(e) (f)

(c) (d)

104

103

1

Ray

leig

h nu

mbe

r

10

Spokes

Squares

Squares orhexagons

Rolls,squares,

orhexagons

Viscosity ratio102 103

Rolls

Bimodal

Figure 31 Convective patterns in fluids with strongly temperature-dependent viscosity (Golden Syrup). (a) Stability map

for rolls, hexagons, and squares. There is a large amount of hysteresis where the realized planform depends on what patternwas originally induced. (b) Squares. (c) Hexagons. (d) Triangles. (e, f) Mosaic instabilities. From White DB (1988) The

planforms and onset of convection with a temperature-dependent viscosity fluid? Journal of Fluid Mechanics 191: 247–286.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 121

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 34: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

layer (e.g., Figure 22) revealed that this shift is asso-ciated with the development of a thick, coldboundary layer, and an increase of the interior tem-perature (White, 1988; Richter et al., 1983). Thetemperature profiles allowed the calculation of theconvective heat flow and viscosity profile, whichshowed that most of the temperature variationsacross the tank occur in the cold TBL, and that thetop part of the latter becomes stagnant (zero convec-tive heat flow). Hence, convection develops in asublayer where the viscosity ratio reaches at most100 (Richter et al., 1983). This stagnant-lid regimehas been observed for Ra up to 108 (Davaille andJaupart, 1993).

Global heat flow measurements were carried outby Booker (1976), Booker and Stengel (1978), andRichter et al. (1983). For the entire range of para-meters (104� Ra� 6� 105 and < 105), the heattransfer differs little from that of a uniform-viscosityfluid when the Rayleigh number is defined with theviscosity at the mean of the boundary temperatures.The relationship between Nusselt number andsupercriticality (Ra/Rac()) is even more remarkablesince it is independent of and indistinguishablefrom the results of Rossby (1969) for constantviscosity:

Nu ¼ 1:46Ra

Rac ð Þ

� �0:281

½10�

Subsequent high-quality heat flow measurements byGiannandrea and Christensen (1993) agree with thislaw. Weeraratne and Manga (1998), Manga andWeraratne (1999), and Manga et al. (2001) extendedthe range of Ra up to 2� 108 for ¼ 1800. Wealready described in the previous section thesequence of regimes which they observed for¼ 170, that is, in absence of a conductive lid(Figure 20). Their heat flux data agree with eqn[10] for Ra up to 2� 106 (Figure 32). For higher Ra

and higher , the heat flux is less than that predictedby [10] and by numerical calculations at infinite Pr.This trend was attributed to inertial effects (Mangaand Weeraratne, 1999).

7.03.6.1.3 Characteristics of the stagnant

lid regime

Davaille and Jaupart (1993, 1994) studied transienthigh Ra convection in a layer of Golden Syrup sud-denly cooled from above. With this setup, the viscositycontrast across the cold TBL, TBL, ranged between 2and 106. For > 100, convection developed only in the

lower part of the TBL, and the upper part remained

stagnant (Figure 33). The Rayleigh number and all

the scaling laws therefore used the viscosity of the

well-mixed interior, since it would be meaningless to

characterize the flow with a viscosity corresponding to

a temperature well within the stagnant fluid. At the

onset of convection, the viscosity contrast across the

unstable region is about 3; in fully developed convec-

tion, it reaches a typical value of 10. The temperature

difference �Teff across the unstable part of the litho-

sphere depends only on the interior temperature Tm

and on a temperature scale controlled by the rheology

�Tc (e.g., Morris, 1982; Morris and Canright, 1984;

Davaille and Jaupart, 1993):

�Tc Tmð Þ ¼ � Tmð Þq�=qTð ÞðTmÞ

�������� ½11�

Laboratory results then give �Teff¼ 2.24�Tc. Anecessary condition for the existence of a stagnantlid is that the applied temperature difference exceedsa threshold value equal to �Teff. All the dynamics ofthe system are then determined locally in theunstable part of the TBL. Following once again thephenomenological model of Howard (1964), the heatflux can therefore be written as

Qs ¼ –Ck �g=�� Tmð Þð Þ1=3�T 4=3c ½12�

where the constant C¼ 0.47 0.03 is determinedexperimentally. This model also predicts well theconvective onset time and the amplitude of the tem-perature fluctuations (Davaille and Jaupart, 1993).

30

10

100 101 102 103

Ra / Rac

104

Aspect ratio 1Aspect ratio 2Aspect ratio 3

3D calculationsby P.Tackley(infinite Pr )

105

2

5

Nu

Nu = 1.46(Ra /Ra c)0.281

Figure 32 Nusselt number as a function of Rayleigh

number. From Manga M and Weeraratne D (1999)

Experimental study of non-Boussinesq Rayleigh–Benardconvection at high Rayleigh and Prandtl numbers. Physics

of Fluids 10: 2969–2976.

122 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 35: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Subsequent numerical and experimental work alsorecovered the functional forms of [11] and [12], with�Teff¼ 2.2–2.6��Tc and C¼ 0.4–0.9 (e.g., Grassetand Parmentier, 1998; Trompert and Hansen, 1998a;Dumoulin et al., 1999; Solomatov and Moresi, 2000;Manga et al., 2001; Gonnermann et al., 2004). In thecase of steady Rayleigh–Benard convection at high Ra,the temperature difference in the hot TBL has beenfound to scale as (1.1–1.3)� �Tc (Solomatov andMoresi, 2000; Manga et al., 2001), which togetherwith [11] allows one to predict the temperature ofthe well-mixed interior (Solomatov, 1995; Mangaet al., 2001). Moreover, since the cold and hot unstablethermal boundary layers have different characteristics,plumes are released from these layers with differentfrequencies, and cold more viscous downwellingscarry a greater temperature anomaly than their hotcounterparts. Measurements show that whereas thereis a single frequency for cold plume formation, hotplumes form with multiple frequencies and in parti-cular may be triggered by cold sinking plumes(Schaeffer and Manga, 2001).

7.03.6.2 Plate Tectonics in the Laboratory?

Mantle convection is characterized by mobile plateson its top surface, which have no chance to be recov-ered in experiments with a rigid top boundary sincethe latter imposes a zero-fluid velocity on the surface.Moreover, 2-D numerical simulations had shownthat the heat transport strongly depends on the mobi-lity of the surface boundary layer (Christensen,1985), which is controlled by the viscosity contrast.Giannandrea and Christensen (1993) and Weinstein

and Christensen (1991) therefore carried out experi-

ments in syrups in a large aspect ratio tank

(Figure 39) to study the effect of a stress-free bound-

ary (Figure 4(b)). They observed two regimes. For

� 1000, the surface layer is mobile. At Ra¼ 105, the

morphology of downwellings changes, from the

spokes obtained with a rigid boundary, to a dendritic

network of descending sheets, with a wavelength

more than 3 times that of the spoke pattern

(Figure 34). The existence of this ‘whole-layer’ or

‘sluggish lid’ mode with an increased wavelength is in

agreement with earlier predictions (Stengel et al.,

1982; Jaupart and Parsons, 1985) and 3-D numerical

calculations (Ogawa et al., 1991). The Nusselt number

drops by 20% for viscosity contrasts between 50 and

5000. For � 1000, a stagnant lid forms on the top of

an actively convecting region; and both the Nusselt

number and the size of the convection cells are nearly

identical for both rigid and free boundaries.Figure 35 shows the regime diagram established

from experimental, numerical, and theoretical analysis

(Solomatov, 1995). With a viscosity contrast across the

lithosphere �107, the Earth should be in the stagnant-

lid regime, that is, a one-plate planet like Mars. So, if

temperature-dependent viscosity is clearly a key ingre-

dient for plate formation, this ingredient alone is not

sufficient to generate ‘plate tectonics’ convection. To

make plate tectonics work, a failure mechanism is

needed and several options have recently been pro-

posed (see Bercovici et al., 2000; Bercovici, 2003; see

Chapters 7.02 and 7.05). The simplest is probably

pseudo-plastic yielding (Moresi and Solomatov, 1998;

Trompert and Hansen, 1998b; Tackley, 2000; Stein

et al., 2004; Grigne et al., 2005): moving plates and thin

0(a) (b)Tm 0

10–1 1 10Viscosity

Temperature 102 103 104 105

0.5

Dep

th

δc

1

0.5

1

(c)

0 0.05Heat flux

0.1

0

(2)(3)

(1)0.5

1

Figure 33 Structure of a layer of Golden Syrup cooled from above (Ra¼ 2.5� 107; ¼ 106). (a) Horizontally averaged

temperature profile. (b) Corresponding viscosity profile. (c) Convective heat flux calculated from the temperature time series.

Its value is 0 in the topmost viscous part of the fluid layer (stagant lid). From Davaille A and Jaupart C (1993) Transienthigh-Rayleigh number thermal convection with large viscosity variations. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 253: 141–166.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 123

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 36: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

weak boundaries appear but subduction remain sym-metric. Gurnis et al., (2000) also pointed out theimportance of lithosphere ‘memory’: the lithospherecan support dormant weak zones (faults or rifts) overlong time periods, but those weak zones can be pre-ferentially reactivated to become new plate boundaries.Another ingredient could be damage (e.g., Bercoviciet al., 2001), which introduces some memory in therheology and allows development over time of weakzones. This approach has been used with some success(e.g., Ogawa, 2003) but a physical understanding of thedamage process from the grain to the lithosphere scale

is still lacking. Anyway, experimentalists are still look-ing for a laboratory fluid presenting the ‘right’ kind ofrheology to allow plate tectonics. However, the studyof the stagnant-lid regime is still relevant for thedynamics of plate cooling, to which we turn now.

7.03.6.3 Stagnant-Lid Regime andLithosphere Cooling

The oceanic lithosphere thickens at it moves awayfrom a mid-ocean ridge (see Chapters 7.07 and 6.05).It has been proposed that cold thermal instabilitiesdevelop in its lower part. Such ‘small-scale convec-tion’ (SSC) was first invoked to explain the flatteningof heat flux and bathymetry of the oceans at old ages(Parsons and Sclater, 1977; Parsons and McKenzie,1978) and later several other phenomena occurringon different time and length scales, such as small-scale (150–500 km) geoid anomalies in the centralPacific (e.g., Haxby and Weissel, 1986) and centralIndian (Cazenave et al., 1987) oceans, differences insubsidence rates (Fleitout and Yuen, 1984; Buck,1987; Eberle and Forsyth, 1995), ridge segmentation(e.g., Sparks and Parmentier, 1993; Rouzo et al., 1995),delamination of the lithosphere under hot spots(Sleep, 1994; Moore et al., 1998; Dubuffet et al.,2000), and patterns of anisotropy beneath thePacific ocean (Nishimura and Forsyth, 1988;Montagner and Tanimoto, 1990; Davaille andJaupart, 1994; Ekstrom and Dziewonski, 1998).

Figure 34 Shadowgraphs of the convection planforms

found for the case of (a) rigid boundaries and (b) a stress-free

upper boundary. From Weinstein SA and Christensen UR(1991) Convection planforms in a fluid with a temperature-

dependent viscosity beneath a stress-free upper boundary.

Geophysical Research Letters 18 : 2035–2038.

1016

Noconvection

Stagnantlid

Sluggish lid

Isoviscous

1012

108

104

0103 106 109

Rayleigh number

Vis

cosi

ty c

ontr

ast

Figure 35 Different regims of thermal convection in a

strongly temperature-dependent fluid with free-slip

boundaries. From Solomatov S (1995) Scaling of temperature-and stress-dependent viscosity convection. Physics of Fluids

7: 266–274. The gray area is the mantle parameters range.

124 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 37: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Davaille and Jaupart (1994) applied the scalinglaws derived from their experimental results, usingfor the mantle a Newtonian creep law with activationenthalpy H:

� Tð Þ ¼ �r expH

RT

� �½13�

For H varying between 150 and 500 kJ mol�1

(the value depends on the creep mechanism and thewater content; see Chapter 2.14), �Teff rangesbetween 310�C and 90�C according to [11] and[13]. Since small-scale instabilities develop whenthe local Rayleigh number based on the characteris-tics of the unstable part of the lithosphere(temperature, viscosity, thickness) exceeds a criticalvalue, the onset of convection depends only on thethermal structure of the lithosphere, and on therheology of mantle material. Following Davailleand Jaupart (1994), the onset time can be written as

�c ¼a

�g�Teff

��m

� �– 2=3

� 1þ b

f �T=�Teffð Þ�T

�Teff– 1

� �� �2

½14�

where �m is the viscosity of the asthenosphere at themantle temperature Tm, a¼ 51.84 and b¼ 0.3013are two constants determined from the laboratoryexperiments, and �T is the temperature dropacross the lithosphere. The function f depends onthe cooling model and for a half-space conductivecooling is given in Figure 36(a) . For a thin stag-nant lid (or �T/�Teff < 3), f� 1. Thisapproximation applies well to laboratory experi-ments and was therefore adopted by Davaille andJaupart (1994; thin line labeled DJ94 onFigure 36(b)). However, as pointed out by subse-quent studies (Dumoulin et al., 2001; Zaranek andParmentier, 2004), �T/�Teff > 4 for the mantlelithosphere and the approximation f� 1 leads tooverestimate the SSC onset time (Figure 36(b))compared to the prediction of [14] without theapproximation (thick black line on Figure 36(b)).In the last years, several numerical studies, usingeither Arrhenius or exponential viscosity laws, haveallowed to extend the range of �T/�Teff studied(Choblet and Sotin, 2000; Dumoulin et al., 2001;Korenaga and Jordan, 2003; Huang et al., 2003;Zaranek and Parmentier, 2004), and to developnew scaling laws. The discrepancies between thedifferent data sets reveal the relative importance ofthe onset time measurement, the type of viscosity

law (10–20% of change only), and the type ofperturbation (initial-time/at-all-times, numerical-noise/finite-size-perturbation) introduced numeri-cally which will grow toward convectiveinstabilities. The latter has the strongest influence(Zaranek and Parmentier, 2004): the longest onsettimes are obtained when the numerical perturba-tions initially introduced are smallest (Choblet andSotin, 2000). The trend of the laboratory experi-ments seems to compare best with numericalexperiments which introduce thermal noise around10�3��T at all times (Figure 36(b)). Then, in theparameter range relevant for the Earth’s mantle

10

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

0 4

f(ΔT

/ΔT

eff)

8 12

ΔT/ΔTeff

ΔT/ΔTeff

16 201

2

3

4

(a)

(b)

2

(τc

/ tR)1\

2

3 4

ZP

HZvH

DJ94

CS

5 6

Figure 36 (a) Function f(x) described in the text (eqn [7]) as

a function of �T/�Teff. (b) Square root of the dimensionlessSSC onset time �c/tR (tR¼��1. �g�T/(��)�2/3) as a function

of �T/�Teff. The black disks represent the laboratory data

of Davaille and Jaupart (1994). The black thick solid line was

calculated with eqn [7], and the thin line labeled DJ94 withthe f�1 approximation. The thin dashed black line labeled

CS shows Choblet and Sotin (2000) calculations, the blue

thick line labeled HZvH, Huang et al. (2003), and the black

dash-dot line labeled ZP, Zaranek and Parmentier’s (2004).In red, data and scaling laws by Korenaga and Jordan

(2003). Squares used an exponential law, and circles an

Arrhenius law.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 125

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 38: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

(�T/�Teff� 4), numerical studies agree with [14]within 25%. So, if the magnitude of the tempera-ture perturbations in the lithospheric mantle issimilar to the laboratory one, an SSC onset timebetween 10 and 100 My is predicted, depending onthe asthenospheric mantle temperature.

7.03.7 Complications: InternalHeating, Continents and Moving Plates

7.03.7.1 Internal Heating

We have so far focused on the dynamics of fluidlayers uniformly heated from below and cooledfrom above. However, the Earth’s mantle is notonly heated along the core–mantle boundary bythe hotter molten iron core, but is also partly heatedfrom within by radiogenic decay of uranium, thor-ium, and potassium distributed throughout themantle (see Chapter 7.06). Thermal convection withboth internal and bottom heating is characterizedby two dimensionless numbers: Ra for the bottomheating given by eqn [1] and an equivalentRayleigh number for the purely internally heatedcase, defined as

RaH ¼�gH 5QH

�k�½15�

where QH is the volumetric rate of internal heatgeneration.

7.03.7.1.1 Purely internally heated fluid

The heat sources are simulated by the Ohmic dis-sipation of an electric current passed through anelectrolyte fluid layer. Electrodes are placed eitheron each of the horizontal boundaries (e.g., Carrigan,1982), or on two of the side walls of the chamber (e.g.,Kulacki and Goldstein, 1972). Polarization effects inthe fluid are eliminated by applying an alternatingcurrent. In all the experiments using this technique,the bottom of the tank is insulated (zero heat flux)and the top of the tank is cooled by a thermostatedbath. One therefore expect only one TBL in thesystem, just below the cold plate.

Most of the experiments that have been per-formed used aqueous solutions. Tritton and Zarraga(1967) and Schwiderski and Schab (1971) visualizedthe planform of convection from marginal stabilityup to the transition to turbulence. Quasi-steady plan-forms were observed with downflow in the centers ofthe cells for RaH� 80Rac. For larger Ra, cells brokeup and turbulent motions appeared. Kulacki and

Goldstein (1972) extended the range up to 675Rac,well into the turbulent regime. Kulacki and Nagle(1975) focused on heat flow measurements as a func-tion of RaH. For the turbulent regime(1.5� 105� RaH� 2.5� 109), their data are consis-tent with a power law Nu� 0.305 Ra0.239. As for thebottom heated case, transitions in the Nu¼ f (RaH)curves were observed at each change of the convec-tive pattern. Thermal fluctuations were also found tobe maximum just outside the upper cold TBL and nobottom hot TBL was observed.

Carrigan (1982) used glycerine (Pr� 3000) for105� RaH� 106. He observed cold spoke patterns upto RaH¼ 108Rac, and a superposition of a large-scalecirculation and cold individual plumes for larger Ra.

7.03.7.1.2 Bottom- and internally-heated

fluid

Following Krishnamurti (1968a), Weinstein andOlson (1990) demonstrated the equivalence betweenthermal convection in a plane layer of fluid withuniformly distributed heat sources between bound-aries with constant temperatures, and thermalconvection in a plane layer of fluid with boundarytemperatures that are spatially uniform but vary intime at a rate dTtop/dt. The effective volumetricinternal heat generation is then

QH ¼ –�CpdTtop=dt ½16�

This technique is simpler and more flexible to usethan the electrolytic one, since it can be used withany fluid and allows the fluid to be heated frombelow as well as internally. Krishnamurti (1968b)performed experiments with silicone oils (Pr� 200)near the onset of convection. Using high Prandtlnumber oils (Pr� 9� 103), Weinstein and Olson(1990) studied the evolution of the convective pat-tern and its time dependence as the proportion ofinternal heating increases (Figure 37). AtRa¼ 1.5� 105, in the absence of internal heat gen-eration, a spoke pattern is observed, in whichconnected spokes of ascending and descendingflows are on average of equal strength. With internalheat generation, the buoyancy becomes concentratedinto the cold downwellings, and the amount of timedependence increases. Hot active instabilities willreappear if there exists a bump on the hot bottomboundary with a height comparable to (or greaterthan) the TBL thickness (Namiki and Kurita, 2001).In this case, hot plumes will be anchored on thebump. So although an internally heated mantle favors

126 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 39: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

cold downwellings, hot plumes can still develop,provided that the bottom of the mantle, or the D0

layer, has some topography.

7.03.7.2 Inhomogeneous Cooling/Continents

Continental lithosphere is thicker than its oceaniccounterpart, and does not subduct. Its crust is alsoricher in radiocative elements. Moreover, heat flowbeneath continents is significantly lower than underoceans (e.g., Jaupart et al., 1998), which tends to showthat continents are more insulating. Hence, conti-nents induce a lateral heterogeneity in both themechanical and thermal conditions at the upperboundary of the mantle. The experimental study ofRossby (1965) showed that any lateral heterogeneityin cooling or heating will generate an horizontallarge-scale flow. Elder (1967) was probably the firstto suggest that the continents, by acting as an insulat-ing lid, could generate a new class of lateral motions.Later studies have therefore focused on characteriz-ing and quantifying the influence of these lateralheterogeneities on mantle thermal convection.

Whitehead (1972, 1976) investigated both theore-tically and experimentally the conditions underwhich a heater mounted on a mobile float couldbecome unstable to drifting motion. For cellular con-vection, the drift was found of the same magnitude asthe characteristic convective velocity.

Guillou and Jaupart (1995) investigated the ther-mal effect of a fixed continent on the convectivepattern and heat flow, using silicone oils and GoldenSyrup for Ra ranging between critical and 106. Thecontinent was modeled as an insulating materialembedded into a cold copper plate (Figure 38), andits size and shape were varied. They observed the

generation of deep hot instabilities localized under

the continent and the generation of cold instabilities

outside or on its edges (Figure 38). The presence of a

continent therefore shields part of the underlying

mantle from subduction (Gurnis, 1988), and also

induces a large-scale convection pattern oceanward

over distances up to 3 times the continent’s size

(Guillou and Jaupart, 1995). Combining experiments,

theory, and simulations, Lenardic et al. (2005) studied

the influence of partial insulation on mantle heat

extraction. Since partial insulation leads to increased

internal mantle temperature and decreased viscosity,

it allows, in turn, for the more rapid overturn of

oceanic lithosphere and increased oceanic heat flux.

For ratios of continental to oceanic surface area lower

than 0.4, global mantle heat flow could therefore

remain constant or even increase as a result. Wenzel

et al. (2004) used the same kind of setup with two-layer

convection. They suggested that, on Mars, the combi-

nation of crustal dichotomy (the martian crust is much

thicker, therefore insulating, in the southern hemi-

sphere than in the northern hemisphere) and

two-layer convection would lead to the formation of

a large-scale upwelling under the southern highlands

that appeared early and endured for billions of years.Zhang and Libchaber (2000) and Zhong and

Zhang (2005) replaced the rigid cold boundary by a

free surface cooled by air, which allowed the insulat-

ing raft to move freely in response to the convection

(Figure 39). The experimental fluid was water, with

Rayleigh numbers ranging from 107 to 4� 108. Like

Guillou and Jaupart (1995), they observed that the

insulating raft distorts the local heat flux and induces

a coherent flow over the experimental cell, which in

turn moves the plate. In their confined geometry, the

plate can be driven to a periodic motion even under

the action of chaotic convection. The period of

(a) (b) (c)

Figure 37 Shadowgraphs of the planform of thermal convection with internal heat generation for Ra¼ 1.5� 105 (spoke

pattern). (a) RaH/Ra¼0; light and dark lines have the same intensity as cold and hot currents have the same strength. (b) RaH/

Ra¼ 6; the dark lines are fading as the downwellings become weaker. (c) RaH/Ra¼18; no hot upwellings are seen anymore.From Weinstein SA and Olson P (1990) Planforms in thermal convection with internal heat sources at large Rayleigh and

Prandtl numbers. Geophysical Research Letters 17: 239–242.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 127

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 40: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

oscillation depends on the coverage ratio and on theRayleigh number (Figure 39).

Nataf et al. (1981) investigated the influence of thesinking cold oceanic lithosphere on the neighboringsubcontinental convection and on the generation ofinstabilities in the horizontal boundary layers by per-forming experiments with cooling from both the topplate and one of the sides. The system dynamics arethen characterized by two Rayleigh numbers: Ra basedon the vertical temperature difference, and a lateralRayleigh number based on the lateral temperaturedifference (Ralat). The lateral cooling induces a largeroll with axis parallel to the cold wall and descendingflow next to it. At constant Ra, the width of the largeroll is proportional to Ralat

1/2, while for constant Ralat/Ra, it scales as�Ra1/6. In the upper mantle such large-scale circulation could become 5 times wider thandeep. The experiments also show that hot instabilitiescannot develop directly beneath the cold downwellingflow, because the spreading of the latter impedes thegrowth of the hot TBL.

7.03.7.3 Moving Top Boundary

We just saw that any large-scale circulation strongly

influences the generation of convective features of

smaller extent. The large-scale motion of plates is

therefore expected to influence all motions within the

mantle, especially small-scale convection under the

cooling lithosphere, and the distribution of hot spots.

Figure 38 Insulating continents from Guillou and Jaupart(1995). Markers along the upper boundary indicate the

extent of insulating material representing continental

lithosphere. Time progresses from top to bottom. Note

upwelling plumes beaneath the interior and descendingsheets near the margins of the insulator.

0.1100

1000

(a)

10000

0.2

0

Pla

te p

ositi

on

–0.4

–0.2

0

0.2

0.4

20 40 60

Heating

FloaterLight

(a)

(b)

(c)

Cooling

Screen

Time (min)80 100

0.3 0.4Coverage ratio

Per

oid

(sec

)

0.5 0.6 0.7

Figure 39 Mobile insulating continent. (a) experimentalsetup. (b) Continent position as a function of time. (c)

Continental drift periodicity as a function of the coverage ratio

(length of the floater divided by tank length). From Zhang J

and Libchaber A (2000) Periodic boundary motion in thermalturbulence. Physical Review Letters 84: 4361–4364.

128 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 41: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Following the theoretical study of Richter (1973),Richter and Parsons (1975) studied the influence of amoving top boundary on the convective pattern for Ra

between 3.3� 103 (rolls) and 1.4� 105 (spokes). Amylar sheet was introduced just below the top coldboundary and pulled at constant velocity U (Figure 4).Besides Ra, another system now controls the systemdynamics, the Peclet number Pe¼UH/�, which com-pares the heat transport by advection and by diffusion.It ranges between 30 and 720 in the experiments.Initially, the top boundary was at rest until the con-vective pattern becomes quasi-steady. For the lowerRa, rolls orthogonal to the spreading direction wereinitiated using the technique of Chen and Whitehead(1968). Then the velocity of the mylar was set to afinite value and the convective pattern followed byshadowgraph. Over the whole Ra range, the patternwas observed to evolve toward rolls parallel to themylar velocity. Scaling laws show that it would prob-ably take 70 My for the geometry of convection toreorganize into rolls parallel to the spreading directionover the whole thickness of the upper mantle.

Experiments of Kincaid et al. (1996), Jellinek et al.

(2002, 2003), and Gonnermann et al. (2004) studiedhow a plume-dominated free convective flow inter-acts with a large-scale passive flow driven by platemotions. Kincaid et al. (1996) focused on the interac-tion of mid-ocean ridges and convection in the uppermantle. The three other papers extended this studyto the whole mantle, higher Ra, and fluids withstrongly temperature dependent viscosity. Jellineket al. (2002, 2003) performed laboratory experimentsusing corn syrup heated from below and driven at itssurface by a ridge-like velocity boundary condition(Figure 40(a)). They documented three differentflow regimes, depending on the ratio V of the spread-ing rate to the typical plume rise velocity and theratio of the interior viscosity to the viscosity of thehottest fluid . When V << 1 and � 1, the plumedistribution is random and unaffected by the large-scale flow. The opposite extreme is represented byV > 10 and > 100, where plume formation issuppressed entirely and the large-scale flow carriesall the heat flux. Interaction of the two flows occursfor intermediate values of V; established plumechannels are now advected along the bottom bound-ary and focused toward an upwelling beneath theridge. The basal heat flux and the TBL thicknessdepend on Pe and . In particular, since cold, andtherefore also more viscous, fluid is rapidly trans-ported from the top to the bottom of the layer, theviscosity contrast across the lower TBL increases,

generating hot plumes with a bigger head to tail

ratio than without plate circulation (Nataf, 1991;

Jellinek et al., 2002). Running more detailed experi-

ments, Gonnermann et al. (2004) proposed a

conceptual framework (Figure 40(b)) whereby the

tank bottom can be divided in four regions. The

large-scale flow impedes the growth of the hot TBL

where the cold and more viscous downwelling

spreads (Nataf et al., 1981), and therefore the hot

TBL is not thick enough in region I to develop

plumes in III. In region II, the TBL becomes thick

enough for hot instabilities to develop in IV. Scalings

were derived for the lateral variations of the bottom

heat flux and the spatial extent of plume suppression.

Applied to the Earth’s mantle, they suggest that

�30% of the core heat flux could be due to increased

heat flux from plate-scale flow. Furthermore, the

core heat flux is expected to vary laterally by at

least a factor of 2. Last, these results explain well

why hot spots seem confined to about a half of the

surface of the Earth, away from ancient subducted

slabs, and preferentially close to mid-ocean ridges

(Weinstein and Olson, 1989).

Conveyor belt

Heat exchangerb

W = 1.5 m(a)

(b)

U

ab

D x

lV

lV

lV

ΙΙΙ

ΙΙΙ

δ < δcδ = δc

ΙΙ

ΙΙ

ΙΙ

Ι

Ι

H = 0.6 m

Figure 40 (a) Experimental setup and shadowgraph at

Ra�5�106. Pe�104 and �100. Note the increasing

thickness of the TBL in the downstream direction. (b)Schematic diagram depicting the four convecting regions.

The TBL is not thick enough in region I to develop plumes in III,

while TBL instabilities develop in regions II and IV. From

Gonnermann HM, Jellinek AM, Richards MA, and Manga M(2004) Modulation of mantle plumes and heat flow at the core

mantle boundary by plate-scale flow: Results from laboratory

experiments. Earth and Planetary Science Letters 226: 53–67.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 129

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 42: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

7.03.8 Close-Up on Plumes: Plumesfrom a Point Source of Buoyancy

Since the mid-1970s, much of the best experimentalwork in mantle dynamics has been devoted to plumesfrom point sources of buoyancy. While plumes in themantle probably develop primarily as instabilities ofthermal boundary layers (e.g., Parmentier et al., 1975;Loper and Stacey, 1983), such instabilities are timedependent and can be difficult to quantify (seeSection 7.03.5). As a first step, therefore, it makessense to investigate the simpler case of an isolatedlaminar ‘starting plume’ rising from a point source ofbuoyancy whose strength is constant in time. Suchplumes are easily studied and photographed in thelaboratory, and have given us some of the most beau-tiful images in the field of experimental geodynamics(e.g., Whitehead and Luther, 1975; Olson and Singer,1985; Griffiths, 1986; Campbell and Griffiths, 1990).Indeed, these images have been so influential thatthey now constitute a sort of ‘standard model’ of amantle plume as a large, bulbous cavity (the head)trailed by a narrow conduit (the tail) connecting itwith its source (Figure 5). According to this model,the arrival of a plume head at the base of the litho-sphere produces massive flood basalts, while thetrailing conduit generates the subsequent volcanictrack (Richards et al., 1989). The model successfullyexplains important features of several prominent hotspots, including the volume of the topographic swell(e.g., Davies, 1988; Olson, 1990; Sleep, 1990) and thevolume ratio between flood basalts and island chainvolcanism (Olson and Singer, 1985; Richards et al.,1989), as discussed in more detail in Chapter 7.09.

7.03.8.1 Compositionally Buoyant Plumes

The early experiments on starting plumes in viscousfluids (Whitehead and Luther, 1975; Olson andSinger, 1985) were done by injecting compositionallybuoyant fluid (typically corn syrup) at a constant ratefrom a pipe at the bottom of a large reservoir of asecond fluid. The great advantage of this experimen-tal setup is its simplicity: experiments can beperformed under ambient laboratory conditions,with no temperature control required. Whiteheadand Luther (1975) investigated the evolution of start-ing plumes for short times after the beginning ofinjection, during which the buoyant fluid forms aquasi-spherical ball that grows until it is large enoughto ‘lift off’ from the injector (Figure 5). They

proposed that the ball lifts off when its buoyant ascentspeed (as predicted by Stokes law; see Chapter 7.04)exceeds the rate of increase of its radius, which occursat a critical time tsep and radius asep given by

tsep ¼4�

3Q

� �1=4 �m

g�

� �3=4

; asep ¼3Q

4�

� �1=3

t 1=3sep ½17�

where Q is the volumetric injection rate, �m is theviscosity of the ambient fluid, g�¼ g (�m� �p)/�¼ g

��/� is the reduced gravitational acceleration, and�m and �p are the densities of the ambient andinjected fluids, respectively. Both the time and radiusof separation increase with increasing viscosity of theambient fluid. For the large viscosities typical ofthe mantle, plume heads must be quite large(radius > 100 km) to separate from their source(Whitehead and Luther, 1975).

After liftoff, the morphology and dynamics ofstarting plumes depend strongly on the viscosityratio ¼ �p/�m, where �p is the viscosity of theinjected fluid (Whitehead and Luther, 1975; Olsonand Singer, 1985). When the injected fluid is moreviscous ( > 1), the plume has roughly the shape of acylinder (Figure 5(a)) whose length and radiusincrease with time. Olson and Singer (1985) calledthis a ‘diapiric’ plume. In the more geophysicallyrealistic limit << 1, the ascending plume is a ‘cavityplume’ comprising a large head and a thin trailingconduit (Figure 5(b)). The rate of change of thevolume V of the head is just the injected flux Q lessthe flux required to build the (lengthening) stem, or

dV

dt¼ Q – �R2

cW ½18�

where Rc X ð8�pQ =�g�Þ1=4 is the radius of the con-duit required to carry the flux Q by Poiseuille(cylindrical pipe) flow and W is the velocity of thehead predicted by Stokes’s law. For long times, asteady state (dV/dt¼ 0) is achieved in which thehead reaches a terminal velocity Wterm and radiusaterm (Whitehead and Luther, 1975):

Wterm ¼ g�Q =8�vp

� �1=2; aterm ¼ 3Wterm�m=g�ð Þ1=2 ½19�

More recent experiments have shown that under cer-tain conditions compositionally buoyant cavityplumes can entrain the denser ambient fluid throughwhich they rise (Neavel and Johnson, 1991; Kumagai,2002). Kumagai (2002) identified two distinct regimes:a ‘vortex ring’ regime for � 1 in which layers ofentrained fluid form a scroll-like pattern inside theplume head, and a ‘chaotic stirring’ regime for > 100

130 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 43: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

(see Section 7.03.10). Structures of the vortex ring typealso occur in thermal starting plumes (Shlien, 1976;Shlien and Boxman, 1981; Tanny and Shlien, 1985;Griffiths and Campbell, 1990; Figure 7(c)).

The stem of a chemically buoyant plume can alsosupport solitary waves, waves of large amplitude that

propagate upwards without change in shape. Their

existence was first demonstrated experimentally by

Olson and Christensen (1986) and Scott et al. (1986),

who generated the waves by increasing impulsively

the volume flux Q injected at the bottom of a vertical

conduit surrounded by a fluid with a much greater

viscosity. Whitehead and Helfrich (1988) subse-

quently showed that the flow within such waves

exhibits recirculation along closed streamlines when

viewed in a frame traveling with the wave, and sug-

gested that this might provide a mechanism for

transporting deep material rapidly to the surface

with little contamination. Subsequent numerical

experiments (Schubert et al., 1989) showed that ther-

mal plume stems could also support solitary waves,

and Laudenbach and Christensen (2001; Figure 41)

performed an experimental study of solitary waves of

hot fluid in a vertical conduit. Solitary waves on thestems of thermal plumes have been invoked to explainepisodic magma production at weak hot spots andsurges of activity at stronger hot spots (Laudenbachand Christensen, 2001) and the formation of the V-shaped ridges on the Reykjanes ridge south of Iceland(Albers and Christensen, 2001; Ito, 2001).

7.03.8.2 Thermal Plumes

Because the buoyancy force that causes plumes to risein the Earth’s mantle is, to a large degree, thermal inorigin, numerous laboratory investigations of thermalplumes in viscous fluids have been carried out sincethe mid-1980s. The first experiments on laminar start-ing plumes (Shlien and Thompson, 1975; Shlien, 1976)were not motivated by geophysical applications, andwere performed using water and a narrow electrode asa heater. Experiments in this configuration typicallyused interferometry and particle tracking to recoverthe temperature (Figure 12(c)) and velocity fields(e.g., Shlien and Boxman, 1979; Tanny and Shlien,1985; Chay and Shlien, 1986). By contrast, investiga-tions of plumes in more viscous fluids have until nowmostly focused on more global features such as thevolume and ascent rate of the plume head. Because theviscosity of many experimental fluids decreasesstrongly with increasing temperature, hot thermalstarting plumes generally are cavity plumes compris-ing a large head and a narrow stem. In someexperiments, however, the heat source is suddenlyturned off to produce an isolated head (‘thermal’)that rises without a trailing conduit. The discussionbelow begins with this latter case (Figure 6(a)), andthen turns to the dynamics of steady plume stems andthermal starting plumes (Figures 42 and 43).

7.03.8.2.1 Thermals

Griffiths (1986) conducted a laboratory study of ther-mals generated by injecting a known volume ofheated polybutene oil into a large tank of the sameoil at room temperature. He observed that a thermalinitially rises at constant speed through a distance ofthe order of its diameter, and then slows down whileincreasing in volume. Griffiths proposed that theenlargement occurs because diffusion of heat awayfrom the thermal warms a thin boundary layer ofambient fluid around it, which is then advectedback to the thermal’s trailing edge and entrainedinto it. The total buoyancy of the thermal is thereforeconstant, and is proportional to the Rayleigh numberRa¼�g�T0V0/��m, where V0¼ �a0

3 is the thermal’s

Figure 41 Thermal soliton. From Laudenbach N and

Christensen UR (2001) An optical method for measuringtemperature in laboratory models of mantle plumes.

Geophysical Journal International 145: 528–534.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 131

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 44: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

initial volume and �T0 its initial temperature excess.

Griffiths (1986) suggested that for times greater than�G � Ra�1/2 a0

2/�, the thermal’s volume V and velo-city W have the self-similar forms

V ¼ �C31

6Ra3=4 �tð Þ3=2; W ¼ f

2�C1Ra3=4 �tð Þ – 1=2 ½20�

where f¼O (1) is a function of the viscosity contrastbetween the thermal and the ambient fluid andC1� 1.0 is a constant determined experimentally.Laboratory experiments using viscous oils (Griffiths,1986a) and corn syrup (Coulliette and Loper, 1995) areconsistent with [20]. In the mantle, thermals with radii>350 km would reach the lithosphere before beinginfluenced by thermal diffusion in typically 20 Myand their ascent speeds could reach 10–20 cm yr�1.

7.03.8.2.2 The stem

When a starting plume rises from a steady pointsource of heat, the lower part of its stem quicklyachieves a steady-state structure that is independentof the dynamics of the ascending head above. Tounderstand this structure, Batchelor (1954) studiedanalytically a model in which a plume rises from apoint source of heat of strength P in an infinite fluidwith constant viscosity �, thermal diffusivity �, spe-cific heat Cp, and thermal expansion coefficient �.Simple scaling arguments suggest that the vertical velo-city W, the temperature anomaly �T, and the stemradius R scale with the height z above the source as

W � g�P

��Cp�

� �1=2

; �T � P

��Cpz

R � �Cpv�2

g�P

� �1=4

z1=2

½21�

(a) (b)

24.6 °C

40.5 °C31.4 °C

(c) (d)150

100

50

Dep

th (

mm

)

00 0.4

W(r = 0)0.8

Figure 42 Thermal and velocity structures of a plume issued from a point-source heater (with P¼3 W), deduced from

the pictures (a)–(c) taken at the following times: (a) t¼60 s, (b) t¼120 s, (c) t¼ 300 s . The isotherms appear as black lines on thenegatives. The temperature decreases in the stem and the head as height increases. (d) Velocity profiles along the axis r¼ 0 for

t¼ 120 s, measured with a PIV technique. The velocity decreases with increasing height along the stem. The fluid is sugar syrup,

whose viscosity depends on temperature. At 20�C, it is 6 Pa s, and on the heater (54�C) it is 0.3 Pa s. From Vatteville J (2004)Etude experimentale des panaches: Structure et evolution temporelle. Memoire de DEA, ENS Lyon/IPG Paris.

W(r, z )

W(r, z )

0.2

0.95

0.80.5

0.05

θ(r, z )

θ(r, z )

Radius, r0

(a)

(b) 2500

2000

1500

1000

500

0–80 –60 –40 –20 0

Radius (km)

Dep

th (

km)

20 40 60 80

Figure 43 Thermal plume stem at high Prandtl number.

(a) Sketch of the radial temperature (solid line) and vertical

velocity (dashed line) profiles for constant viscosity: the plumethermal anomaly is embedded into the velocity boundary

layer. (b) Model of Olson et al. (1993) for strongly temperature-

dependent viscosity in the mantle: the high velocity conduit(left) is embedded in a ‘thermal halo’ (right). Temperature and

velocity are normalized by their maximum value on the axis.

132 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 45: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

The vertical velocity is constant, but thermal diffu-sion causes the temperature anomaly to decreasewith height as z�1 and the stem radius to increaseas z1/2. The scalings [21] are valid to within multi-plicative functions of the Prandtl number Pr¼ �/�,which have been determined numerically and/oranalytically (Fuji, 1963; Worster, 1986; Vasquezet al., 1996). Experiments in water (Pr� 7) verify thescalings [22] and agree with the complete functionalform of Fuji (1963) if corrections are made for thefinite size of the heat source and for downward heatlosses from it (Shlien and Boxman, 1979; Tanny andShlien, 1985).

The scaling [21] is no longer valid in the limitof infinite Pr, because the model problem studiedby Batchelor (1954) has no solution if the fluid isinfinite and inertia is totally absent (Stokes para-dox; see Chapter 7.07). However, a solution doesexist if the heat source is located on a horizontal(rigid or free) boundary, and has a vertical velocityW given by [21] multiplied by a function thatincreases logarithmically with height (Whittakerand Lister, 2006).

The dynamics are very different when the viscos-ity depends strongly on temperature, as is the case inthe mantle. Figure 43 shows isotherms (a–c) andprofiles of vertical velocity on the axis (d) at differenttimes for a thermal plume above a heater in cornsyrup (Vatteville, 2004). The lower portion 20 mm� z� 70 mm of the plume quickly reaches a steadystate, as shown by the similarity of the isotherms andvelocity profiles for t¼ 120 s and 300 s in this heightrange. Moreover, the vertical velocity decreasesstrongly with height, in contrast with the constant-viscosity case. Similar results were found byLaudenbach (2001) along the stem of a plume ofheated corn syrup, which was injected at the bottomof a tank filled with the same fluid at roomtemperature.

These observations are well explained by Olsonet al.,’s (1993) approximate solution of the boundary-layer equations for the steady flow above a pointsource of heat in a fluid whose viscosity dependsexponentially on temperature. The upwelling velo-city W on the axis and the temperature anomaly �T

vary with height z as

W ¼ g�P

4��Cp�0 zð Þ

� �1=2

�T ¼�T0 exp– 4�k�Tr z

P

� � ½22�

where �0(z) is the viscosity on the plume centerline,�T0 is the temperature anomaly at the base of theplume, k is the thermal conductivity, and �Tr is thetemperature required to change the viscosity by afactor e. The expression [22] for W is identical tothe constant-viscosity expression [21] except for thevariability of the centerline viscosity �0(z). Thetemperature anomaly decreases exponentially withheight, and the corresponding increase in viscositycauses the upwelling velocity W also to decreasewith height, in qualitative agreement with theexperimental observations. The differences relativeto the constant-viscosity case are due to the fact thattemperature-dependent viscosity concentrates theupwelling in the hottest central part of the plumestem, so that the radius T of the thermal anomaly iswider than the radius w of the upwelling region(the ‘conduit’ proper) even for Pr >> 1 (Figure 42).For typical mantle parameter values, plumes withlarge viscosity variations (�1000) would havew� 25–30 km and T� 60 km, while plumes withlow viscosity variations (�100) are typically twiceas broad.

7.03.8.2.3 Thermal starting plumes

A thermal starting plume is essentially an ascendingthermal connected by a stem to a source of buoyancy(Figure 5). Thus, the plume head can grow both byentrainment of ambient fluid and by the addition ofplume fluid through the stem. Unfortunately, noreliable scaling laws have yet been found to describethe evolution of the size and speed of the plume headin this case, and different studies give conflictingresults.

Griffiths and Campbell (1990) investigated ther-mal starting plumes by injecting hot glucose syrupwith a temperature excess �T0 into a cooler reser-voir of the same fluid at a constant volumetric rate Q.They proposed that the volume V of the plume headevolves as

dV

dt¼ Q þ C2ð�g��T0Qt=�mÞ1=2

V 1=3 ½23�

where �m is the viscosity of the cold ambient fluidand C2 is an empirical entrainment constant. Forlarge times the second (entrainment) term in [23] isdominant, implying

V ¼ 4C2

9

� �3=2

��3=4t 9=4 ½24�

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 133

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 46: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

where � ¼ ð�g�T0Q =�mÞ3=4. The correspondingvelocity of the head, calculated from Stokes’s lawfor a relatively inviscid drop, is

W ¼ 1

8

6

� �2=3

C– 1=22 � �tð Þ1=4 ½25�

On the basis of experiments with thermals, Griffithsand Campbell (1990) state that 1�C2� 4. Equation[24] describes well the experimental data for inter-mediate times, although at larger times the capgrowth rate becomes lower than predicted and isbetter described by the law V� t3/2 [20] for an iso-lated thermal (Figure 44).

Experiments on plumes produced by localizedheating without fluid injection (Moses et al., 1993;

Coulliette and Loper, 1995; Kaminski and Jaupart,

2003; Vatteville, 2004) show a different behavior:

the velocity of the head increases rapidly for a

short time and then attains a nearly constant

value Wterm. To explain this, Coulliette and

Loper (1995) proposed a modified version of the

Griffiths and Campbell (1990) model that

accounted for incomplete entrainment of the hot

thermal boundary layer surrounding the head.

However, the resulting theory involves empirical

constants whose values vary by factors of 2–5

among experiments. A possible cause of the diffi-

culty may be the theory’s neglect of the flux

required to build the lengthening stem, which is

important for compositional plumes (Whitehead

and Luther, 1975; Olson and Singer, 1985).

7.03.8.3 Interaction of Plumes with aLarge-Scale Flow

Because deep-seated plumes must traverse the con-vecting mantle on their way to the surface, it isimportant to investigate how they interact with anambient large-scale flow. This interaction was firststudied by Skilbeck and Whitehead (1978), whoinjected compositionally buoyant fluid into a shearflow generated by rotating the top surface of a tankcontaining another fluid. As the rising plume head isswept horizontally away from the source, the trailingconduit is tilted until it becomes gravitationallyunstable at a tilt angle �30� from the vertical. Theinstability forms new, smaller cavity plumes whosespacing is independent of the volume flux Q

(Whitehead, 1982). Olson and Singer (1985) per-formed similar experiments by towing the source atconstant speed U at the bottom of a tank of motion-less fluid. The characteristic spacing and volume V

of the new cavity plumes generated by the instabilitywere found to scale as � 12ð�mU=g�Þ1=2 and

V 12ð�m=g�UÞ1=2Q , respectively, although these

relationships break down for small (<0.3) and large(>10) values of the dimensionless parameter (g�Q/�mU2)1/2. Skilbeck and Whitehead (1978) suggestedthat this instability might account for the discretecharacter of volcanic island chains.

Richards and Griffiths (1988) studied experimen-tally the interaction between a compositionallybuoyant plume conduit and a large-scale shear flow,for low conduit tilt angles at which the instabilitydocumented by Skilbeck and Whitehead (1978) doesnot occur. They showed that the conduit’s shape canbe calculated by describing its motion as a vector sumof the shear velocity and a modified vertical Stokesvelocity vs for individual conduit elements. For asimple linear shear flow, the resulting steady-stateshape is a parabola. In response to a sudden changein the shear flow, the lateral position x(z) of such aconduit adjusts to a new steady-state position in atime z/vs, where z is the height. Griffiths andRichards (1989) applied this theory to Hawaii, con-cluding that the sharpness of the bend in theHawaiian–Emperor chain at 43 Ma implies that thedeflection of the Hawaiian plume before the changein plate motion was <200 km.

Kerr and Meriaux (2004) carried out a compre-hensive laboratory study of thermal plumesascending in a shear flow in a fluid with tempera-ture-dependent viscosity. Plumes were observed torise initially with a constant velocity that is

Figure 44 Volume of a starting plume as a function of

time. The circles represent the experimental data pointsfrom Griffiths and Campbell (1990). In dashed lines, the t1/3

law for a growing Stokes sphere (Whitehead and Luther

1975), the t9/4 growth model of Griffiths and Campbell

(1990), and the t3/2 law due to the conductive growth of theplume cap.

134 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 47: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

independent of the centerline viscosity �p.Subsequently, the ambient shear tilts the plume con-duits, and in some cases significant cross-streamcirculation and entrainment is seen. However, thetilted conduits never develop Rayleigh–Taylor-type gravitational instabilities of the kind observedon tilted compositional conduits, perhaps becausethermal diffusion is fast enough to suppress theirgrowth (Richards and Griffiths, 1988).

7.03.8.4 Plume–Lithosphere Interactions

Because the interaction of plumes with the litho-sphere is responsible for most of the geochemicaland geophysical signatures observed at hot spots,the dynamics of this process has been the focus ofnumerous experimental studies. The more generalcase of the interaction of plumes with density and/or viscosity boundaries within the mantle will betreated together with two-layer convection inSection 7.03.9.

7.03.8.4.1 Interaction with a stagnant

lithosphere

To understand the formation of bathymetric swellsby plumes, Olson and Nam (1986) performed labora-tory experiments on the deformation of an initiallyspherical drop of buoyant low-viscosity fluid risingtoward a high-viscosity boundary layer at the cooledfree surface of a fluid with strongly temperature-dependent viscosity. They measured the amplitudeof the surface topography as a function of time usinga proximity probe (Section 7.03.3.5; Figure 17), andfound that the typical evolution comprises a phase ofrapid uplift followed by slower subsidence that cor-responds to stagnation and lateral spreading of thedrop below the cold boundary layer. The maximumswell height increased with the drop volume, butdecreased with increasing lithosphere thickness.Griffiths et al. (1989) confirmed these results usingholographic interferometry (Figure 17), andextended the study to larger viscosity and buoyancycontrasts between the lithosphere and the underlyingmantle. They found the maximum swell height to beindependent of the viscosity contrast, but a decreas-ing function of the density contrast.

Using experiments performed under isothermalconditions, Griffiths and Campbell (1991) deter-mined scaling laws for the radius of a dropspreading beneath a solid plate and the thickness ofthe ‘squeeze film’ above the drop as functions of time.They observed that the gravitationally unstable

interface between the drop and the squeeze filmeventually broke up via a Rayleigh–Taylor instabil-ity with a complex lateral planform dominated byshort-wavelength (�drop thickness) upwellings anddownwellings.

Olson et al. (1988) studied the penetration of man-tle plumes through colder and more viscouslithosphere, whereas Jurine et al. (2005) investigatedhow thermal plumes deform and penetrate a compo-sitionally distinct lithosphere. The amplitude andshape of the penetration was found to depend mostlyon the ratio B between the compositional and thermaldensity contrasts (buoyancy number; see Section7.03.9), while the timescale of the interface displace-ment is governed primarily by the viscosity contrast.When applied to the continental lithosphere, theexperimentally derived scaling laws show thatplume penetration through Archean lithosphererequires thermal anomalies larger than 300 K, corre-sponding to buoyancy fluxes in excess of thosedetermined today for the Hawaiian plume. Butbecause the experimental plumes are observed tointeract differently with lithospheres of differentages and/or compositions, no single ‘typical’ plumesignature can be identified.

7.03.8.4.2 Interaction with a moving orrifting lithosphere

While the interaction of a plume with a stationarylithosphere is relatively easy to study in the labora-tory, analog modeling of a moving lithosphere posesserious challenges, including the difficulty of control-ling the temperature on the moving boundary andthe unwanted influence of the return flow the bound-ary motion induces (see Section 7.03.7). Here twocases must be distinguished: interaction of theplume with an intact lithosphere moving at constantspeed relative to it (‘plume–plate interaction’ or PPI),and interaction of the plume with a rifting litho-sphere representing a mid-ocean ridge (‘plume–ridge interaction’ or PRI). To date there exist noexperimental studies of PPI, which has been investi-gated solely with analytical and numerical methods(e.g., Olson, 1990; Ribe and Christensen, 1994, 1999).By contrast, PRI has been successfully modeled inthe laboratory.

The first case to be studied was that of a ‘ridge-centered’ plume rising directly beneath a spreadingridge, Iceland being the main natural example.Feighner and Richards (1995) investigated this caseby injecting compositionally buoyant fluid from apipe beneath the boundary between two diverging

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 135

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 48: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

mylar sheets at the top of a tank of corn syrup. Theyobserved that the buoyant fluid spreads beneath themylar sheets to form a thin layer with a steady ‘bow-tie’ shape in mapview. They found that the width ofthe layer along the ridge scales as (Q/U)1/2, where Q

is the volumetric injection rate and U is the half-spreading rate, in agreement with the predictions ofnumerical models based on lubrication theory (Ribeet al., 1995) and the tracking of chemically buoyanttracer particles (Feighner et al., 1995.) This work wasextended by Kincaid et al. (1995) to the interaction ofa thermal plume with a mylar-sheet spreading ridgelocated at some distance from it. The mantle wasmodeled using a concentrated sucrose solution, pro-ducing a highly viscous upper boundary layer (the‘lithosphere’) that cooled and thickened as it movedaway from the ridge. Kincaid et al. (1995) observedthat the plume material can be guided toward theridge along the sloping base of the lithosphere,confirming the suggestion of Schilling (1991) thatan off-axis plume may communicate thermally andchemically with a spreading ridge.

7.03.9 Inhomogeneous Fluids: Mixingand Thermochemical Convection

These studies have arisen from two fundamentalquestions in mantle dynamics:

1. How can the dispersion observed in geochem-ical data be interpreted in dynamical terms? Sincegeochemical isotopic signatures modify neither thedensity nor the physical properties (rheology, ther-mal expansion, and thermal diffusion) of mantlematerials, they constitute passive tracers of mantleflow (e.g., Allegre, 1987). The question thereforerelates to the more general problem of convectivemixing of passive tracers.

2. What is the convective pattern in the mantle?Can mantle convection be stratified? There arenumerous sources of compositional heterogeneitiesin the mantle, such as slab remnants (e.g., Olson andKincaid, 1991; Christensen and Hofmann, 1994),delaminated continental material, relics of a primi-tive mantle (Gurnis and Davies, 1986; Tackley, 1998;Kellogg et al., 1999) enriched, for example, in iron(Javoy 1999), or chemical reactions with or infiltra-tion from the core (e.g., Hansen and Yuen, 1988). So,how does a density heterogeneity interact with ther-mal convection?

Both questions involve time-dependent 3-D phe-nomena occuring on a wide range of spatial scales,abrupt gradients of physical properties (e.g., densityand viscosity), and intricate physical phenomena(stirring, entrainment) for which even the equationsremain to be found. Laboratory experiments havetherefore proved to be a good tool to tackle theseproblems. A more complete review of mixing in themantle is given by Tackley in Chapter 7.10.

7.03.9.1 Mixing of Passive Tracers

An impurity is said to be a passive tracer when it doesnot modify the flow field transporting it. This condi-tion requires the impurity either to be neutrallybuoyant, or to have a characteristic length scalevery small compared to that of the flow. Mixing ofan impurity involves two phenomena: (1) stirring,that is, stretching and folding of the heterogeneityuntil its length scale becomes small enough for che-mical diffusion to act, followed by (2) diffusiveerasure of the heteregeneity (e.g., Reynolds, 1894;Nagata, 1975; Ottino, 1989). Given the small valuesof chemical diffusion coefficients in the mantle (typi-cally 10�15 cm2 s�1; Hofmann and Hart, 1978), thelatter process will act only over a few centimeters ongeological timescales. Stirring is therefore the processof greater interest for geodynamics (see Chapters 7.02and 7.10).

Our current understanding of mixing has signifi-cantly improved in the last 20 years, due to theestablishment of a clear connection between chaosand stirring (e.g., Aref, 1984). Essential to this break-through were careful laboratory experiments inprototypical flows, first in 2-D, time periodic flows(e.g., Ottino et al., 1988) then in 3-D flows (e.g.,Fountain et al., 1998). In particular, studies in simpleperiodic 2-D flows have helped visualize chaos(Figure 45): unmixed regions translate, stretch, andcontract periodically, and represent the primaryobstacle to efficient mixing. Particle trajectories inchaotic regions separate exponentially in time, andmaterial filaments are continuously stretched andfolded by means of horseshoes. The details seen inFigure 45 would have been impossible to see incomputer simulations since numerical diffusion isgreater than the molecular diffusion in the fluidexperiments. However, a special effort has beenmade in mixing studies to couple to the extent pos-sible simple lab experiments and numericalsimulations of the same flow, since the latter givemuch more ready access to the velocity field and

136 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 49: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

other quantities such as the time-dependent stretch-ing field. Recent theoretical work has provided asolid connection between maxima of the stretchingfield and invariant manifolds of the flow (Haller andYang, 2000; Haller, 2001). In a flow which can bedescribed analytically, the comparison between com-putations of stretching and dye visualization showsthat the dye spreads over regions that have experi-enced large stretching. The use of high-resolutionPIV technique in laboratory experiments now allowsus to calculate the in situ stretching field (e.g., Vothet al., 2002). This gives a powerful new insight intothe geometrical structure which underlies mixing,even for nonanalytical flow field.

The more specific study of mixing by thermalconvection in the laboratory has been confined to2-D and weakly 3-D patterns. Solomon and Gollub(1988a, 1988b) studied the passive transport ofmethylene blue and latex spheres by steady 2-DRayleigh–Benard convection. The convective flowwas monitored by laser Doppler velocimetry andthe transport by optical absorption techniques. Thetransport in this system is determined by the inter-play between advection of tracer particles along thestreamlines within convection rolls and diffusion ofthese particles between adjacent rolls. They foundthat the transport on long space and timescales couldbe modeled as a diffusive process with an effective

diffusion coefficient D��DPe1/2¼D(Wd/�D)1/2,where D is the molecular diffusion, W the character-istic velocity of the flow, and Pe the Peclet number.When the 2-D convection is time periodic, the localeffective diffusion coefficient becomes independentof the molecular diffusion but depends linearly onthe local amplitude of the roll oscillation. The basicmechanism of transport is chaotic advection in thevicinity of oscillating roll boundaries (Solomon andGollub, 1988b). Solomon et al. (1996) verified that D�

is related to the areas of the lobes which are carryingtracers between two cells (Figure 46). For weaklytime-dependent and 3-D flows, Solomon and Mezic(2003) observed completely uniform mixing whenthe pattern oscillation period was close to typicalcirculation times, as predicted by ‘singularity-diffu-sion’ theory.

7.03.9.2 Convection in an InitiallyStratified Fluid

The most commonly studied situation comprises twosuperposed fluid layers of different composition,density, and viscosity (Figure 47) across which atemperature difference �T is applied. Since convec-tion occurs in the Earth’s mantle on large scales(>>1 km), and surface tension acts on millimeterscales, we shall confine our review to the case oftwo miscible fluids. When the viscosity depends ontemperature, �m and �d are taken to be the values at

Figure 45 Mixing produced by discontinuous cavity flow.

The top wall moves from left to right for half a period and

then stops, then the bottom wall moves from right to left and

stops, and so on. Visualization is provided by a fluorescenttracer dissolved in glycerine excited by a longwave

ultraviolet light of 365 nm. Folding and an island of unmixed

material are clearly seen. From Ottino JM, Leong CW,

Rising H, and Swanson PD (1988) Morphological structuresproduced by mixing in chaotic flows. Nature 333: 419–426.

Figure 46 Transport of uranine dye along an array ofconvection cells oscillating with a amplitude of 0.12. Time

(from the top): 1, 2, 3, 4, 10 oscillations. From Solomon TH,

Tomas S and Warner (1996) The Role of Lobes in ChaoticMixing of Miscible and Immiscible Impurities. Physical

Review Letters 77: 2682–2685.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 137

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 50: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

the mean temperature of each layer. In cases wherethe thermal expansion coefficient also depends ontemperature (Le Bars and Davaille, 2004a, 2004b), itis taken to be the value at the temperature of thelayer interface. Accordingly, the system dynamics arecharacterized by five dimensionless numbers:

• the Rayleigh number, Ra(H, �T) defined usingeqn [1] with �¼max(�d, �m);

• the Prandtl number Pr¼ �/�;

• the viscosity ratio ;

• the depth ratio a¼ hd/H; and

• the buoyancy ratio, B ¼ ��X=���T , ratio of thestabilizing chemical density anomaly

�� to the destabilizing thermal density anomaly.

7.03.9.2.1 Regime diagrams

Early work used linear stability analysis to investi-gate the stability of various two-layer systems as a

function of Rayleigh number and density contrast(Richter and Johnson, 1974; Busse, 1981; Sotin andParmentier, 1989). The presence of a deformableinterface offers the possibility of Hopf bifurcations:since it introduces an additional degree of freedom,overstability can occur in the form of oscillatoryinterfacial instability (Richter and Johnson, 1974;Renardy and Joseph, 1985; Renardy and Renardy,1985; Rasenat et al., 1989; Le Bars and Davaille,2002; Jaupart et al., 2007). This overstable mode wasobserved experimentally for the first time by Le Barsand Davaille (2002) (Figure 48). At first, numericalstudies of two-layer convection at finite amplitudehave typically focused on the mechanism of coupling(thermal vs. mechanical) between the layers, oftentreating the interface as impermeable (e.g., Richterand McKenzie, 1981; Kenyon and Turcotte, 1983;Christensen and Yuen, 1984; Cserepes andRabinowicz, 1985; Boss and Sacks, 1986; Cserepeset al., 1988). For a long time, the highly nonlinearconvective regimes associated with high Rayleighnumbers or entrainment at the interface were acces-sible only to laboratory experiments.

Using aqueous glycerol solutions, Richter andMcKenzie (1981) showed that two-layer convectionis stable when the ratio of chemical to thermal buoy-ancy B exceeds unity, but they did not address theissue of partial mixing. Olson (1984) used aqueoussugar solutions to study two-layer convection in thepenetrative regime B� 1 when the viscosity ratiobetween the two layers is lower than 10. His results

Ttop

H

hd

ηm,ρm

ηd, ρd = ρm + Δρ

Tbot = Ttop + ΔT

Figure 47 Sketch of two-layer convection. The denserlayer is initially at the bottom.

(a)

Whole layer Stratified

(b)

(c)

Overturning

Overstable

No convection

Buoyancy number

Ray

leig

h nu

mbe

r

OverstableRac

Ra0

Bc

Figure 48 (a) Marginal stability curves separating the different convective regimes. The curves here were calculated for

the case ¼6.7 and a¼ 0.5, where Ra0¼ 5430, Rac¼38 227 and Bc¼0.302. For B < Bc, the whole-layer regime developsunder the form of (b) overturn for around 1 and/or low B (here B¼0.048; Ra¼6.7�103; a¼ 0.44; ¼1.1), or (c) traveling

waves at low Rayleigh number (here B¼ 0.20; Ra¼1.8�104; a¼0.5; ¼6.7). From Le Bars M and Davaille A (2002) Stability

of thermal convection in two superimposed miscible viscous fluids. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 471: 339–363.

138 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 51: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

established that entrainment at low Reynolds number

can indeed occur, and that viscous stresses can sub-

stitute for inertial instabilities as a mixing

mechanism. Nataf et al. (1988) demonstrated that

the mechanism of coupling between immiscible

fluid layers depends on conditions at the interface

(e.g., surface tension and impurities), and that the

oscillatory interfacial mode is stabilized by surface

tension, as predicted by theory.Numerous studies now exist on the subject and

the domain of parameters investigated is therefore

large, with 102 < Ra < 109, 10�2 < < 6� 104,

0.05 < a < 0.95, 0.04 < B < 10. The experiments have

been run with constant viscosity (e.g., aqueous

Natrosol solutions) or temperature-dependent visc-

osity fluids, (e.g., sugar or corn syrups) and with

constant or temperature-dependent thermal expan-

sion. The different regimes observed in laboratory

experiments (Richter and McKenzie, 1981; Olson,

1984; Olson and Kincaid, 1991; Davaille, 1999a,

1999b; Davaille et al., 2002; Le Bars and Davaille,

2002, 2004a; Jellinek and Manga, 2002, 2004;

Cottrell et al., 2004; Jaupart et al., 2007), but also in

numerical simulations (Schmeling, 1988; Tackley,

1998, 2002; Kellogg et al., 1999; Montague and

Kellogg, 2000; Hansen and Yuen, 2000; Samuel and

Farnetani, 2002; McNamara and Zhong, 2004) are

shown in Figure 49 and Table 1 and described in

more detail below.For B < 0.03, chemical density heterogeneities are

negligible and the system behaves as a single homo-

geneous fluid (Figure 49(a)). For larger values of B

and Ra > 105, two scales of convection coexist: com-

positionally homogeneous thermal plumes generated

at the outer boundaries, and large-scale thermoche-

mical instabilities that involve both fluids.Whole-layer regime and unstable doming. When B is

less than a critical value Bc� 0.4 (the exact value

depending on the viscosity and depth ratios; Le Bars

and Davaille, 2002; Jaupart et al., 2007), the stable

compositional stratification can be overcome by

thermal buoyancy. The interface between the layers

then becomes unstable, and convection occurs over

the whole depth. An important characteristic of the

interfacial instability is the ‘spouting’ direction

(Whitehead and Luther, 1975), defined as the direc-

tion (up or down) in which finite-amplitude

perturbations grow superexponentially to form

dome-like structures (Figures 49(e) and 49(f)).

The theory of the Rayleigh–Taylor instability

shows that spouting occurs in the direction of the

layer with the lower ‘resistance’ (Ribe, 1998). Thus,the lower layer will spout into the upper one only if

hd <H

1þ – 1=3½26�

otherwise, spouting is downward (Le Bars andDavaille, 2004a). Condition [26] implies, for exam-ple, that a less viscous layer will spout into a moreviscous overlying mantle only if the former is muchthinner. As for the case of purely compositionalplumes (Figures 5 and 18), the morphology of ther-mochemical instabilities depends on the viscosityratio . Suppose for definiteness that [26] is satisfied,so that spouting is upward. Then when the lowerlayer is more viscous ( > 1), large cylindrical diapirsform (Figure 49(f)), and secondary plumes candevelop above them in the upper layer (Davaille,1999b). When < 1, by contrast, purely thermalinstabilities first develop within the lower layer, andthen merge to form large cavity plume heads(Figure 49(e)). In both cases, if the lower layer isthin, the plumes empty it before they reach the upperboundary, and become disconnected from the lowerboundary as in the purely thermal case (Figure 26).If the layer is thicker and/or 0.2 < B < Bc, the plumesreach the upper boundary before disconnecting fromthe lower (Figure 49(e)). They then begin to cooland lose their thermal buoyancy, and eventually col-lapse back to the bottom, whereupon the cycle beginsagain. When > 5 or < 0.2, each layer retains itsidentity over several pulsations. Since thermal buoy-ancy must overcome the stable compositionalstratification before driving convection, the tempera-ture anomaly carried by thermochemicalinstabilities is the slave of the compositional field(Le Bars and Davaille, 2004a) and is

¼ ð0:98 0:12Þ��X

��½27�

Moreover, the diameter, wavelength, velocity, andcyclicity of the domes are mainly controlled by themore viscous upper layer since it retards motion overthe whole depth (e.g., Whitehead and Luther, 1975;Olson and Singer, 1985; Herrick and Parmentier,1994).

Stratified regime: anchored hot spots, bumps, ridges, and

piles. For B > Bc, thermal buoyancy cannot overcomethe stable compositional stratification. Convectionremains stratified, and a TBL forms at the interfacefrom which long-lived thermochemical plumes are

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 139

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 52: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

generated (Figure 49(d)). These plumes do not have

a well-defined head, and the thermal anomaly they

carry is weak, proportional to the temperature differ-

ence across the unstable part of the TBL above the

interface (Christensen, 1984; Farnetani, 1997;

Tackley, 1998). They entrain a thin filament (at

most 5% of the total plume volume) of the denser

bottom layer by viscous coupling and locally deform

(a) (b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(g) (h)

(f)

or

or

Anchoredthermochemical plumes

cusp

109

108

107

106

105

104

10000.01 0.1 1 10

B

Whole-layer convection = domingLess viscous invading More viscous invading

Ra

Purely thermal plumes Dynamic topography

3-D domesor

Doming ridge

Passiveridge (2-D)

orpile (3-D)

Figure 49 Regimes of thermochemical convection as a function of Rayleigh number and buoyancy number. Parts (a)–(h)

are explained in details in Table 1, and in the text. Black circles: whole-layer convection (open circles for experiments close tomarginal stability.), ‘þ’: stratified convection and anchored plumes with a deformed interface (light shaded area.), ‘x’:

stratified convection with a flat interface, ‘�’: stratified convection and anchored plumes with a non-convecting thinner layer.

Laboratory experiments are shown in red (Richter and McKenzie, 1981); dark blue (Olson and Kincaid, 1991); yellow (Jellineck

and Manga, 2004); and black (Davaille, 1999a, 1999b; Davaille et al., 2002; Le Bars and Davaille, 2002, 2004a). Numericalcalculations are shown in gray (Schmeling, 1988), light blue (Tackley, 1998, 2002), brown (Kellogg et al., 1999; Montague and

Kellogg, 2000), purple (Hansen and Yuen, 2000), green (Samuel and Farnetani, 2002), and pink (McNamara and Zhong, 2004).

140 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 53: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Tab

le1

Co

nvective

reg

ime

and

up

welli

ng

sm

orp

ho

log

yas

afu

nctio

no

fB

,vis

co

sity

ratio,la

yer

dep

thra

tio

a,and

inte

rnalR

ayl

eig

hnum

ber

ofth

ed

enser

bo

tto

mla

yer

Ra

d

BR

eg

ime

¼�

d/�

mR

ad

hd/H

Up

we

llin

gs

mo

rph

olo

gy

Fig

ure

<0.0

31-l

ayer

Therm

alp

lum

es

49a

0.0

3<

B<

Bc�

0.4

Who

le

layer

Active

do

mes

and

passi

ve

rid

ges

<R

ac�

1000

Pass

ive

rid

ges¼

retu

rnflo

wto

do

wnw

elli

ng

s49c

<1

>R

ac

a<

ac

Active

ho

tup

welli

ng

s

ac¼

1/

(1þ�

1/3

)�

Cavity

plu

mes

(or

‘meg

a-p

lum

es’)

thro

ug

hco

llectio

no

fsm

all

therm

al

insta

bili

ties

49e

�d

eta

ch

fro

mho

tb

ott

om

bo

und

ary

(HB

B)

49g

>R

ac

a>

ac

Pass

ive

rid

ges

49c

�re

turn

flo

wto

co

ldm

ore

vis

co

us

do

wnw

elli

ng

s

>1

>R

ac

�A

ctive

ho

td

iap

irs

49f

deta

ch

fro

mH

BB

ifa

<0.3

and

B<

0.2

49g

co

ntinuo

us

fing

ers

fro

mH

BB

oth

erw

ise

49h

�S

eco

nd

ary

plu

mes

on

top

of

do

mes

1/5

<

<5

Overt

urn

ing¼

imm

ed

iate

stirr

ing

aft

er

firs

tin

sta

bili

ties

<

1/5

or

>

5

Puls

atio

ns¼

two

laye

rsre

tain

their

identity

for

severa

ldo

min

gcycle

s49fþ

49h

!B

c2-l

ayers

�S

tratified

co

nvectio

nab

ove

and

belo

win

terf

ace

49b

–d

�A

ncho

red

ho

tth

erm

ochem

icalp

lum

es

arise

fro

mT

BL

at

the

inte

rface.

49d

B>

1N

early

flat

inte

rface

Bc

<B

<1

Dynam

icto

po

gra

phy,d

oes

no

tre

ach

the

up

per

bo

und

ary

49b

–c

<1

Pass

ive

rid

ges

(2D

)o

rp

iles

(3D

)fo

rmed

inre

sp

onse

toco

ldvis

co

us

do

wnw

elli

ng

s

49c

>1

<R

ac

Pass

ive

rid

ges

(2D

)o

rp

iles

(3D

)49c

Ra

c<

Ra

d<

10

4U

pw

elli

ng

rid

ges

49b

>10

4U

pw

elli

ng

do

mes,o

rsup

erp

lum

es

49b

For

dep

th-

or

tem

pera

ture

-dep

end

ent

pro

pert

ies,

the

visc

osi

ties

are

take

nat

the

ave

raged

tem

pera

ture

ofeach

laye

r,and�

ista

ken

at

the

inte

rface.

We

focus

on

hig

hglo

balR

a(>

10

6).

Note

that

ifR

ad

<R

ac,th

ed

ense

rla

yer

cannot

conve

ct

on

his

ow

n.

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 54: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

the interface into cusps (Figure 49(d); Davaille,1999b; Jellinek and Manga, 2002, 2004). The inter-

facial topography and temperature anomaly serves inturn to anchor the plumes (Davaille 1999a, 1999b;Namiki and Kurita, 1999; Davaille et al., 2002;

Jellinek and Manga, 2002, 2004; Matsumo et al.,2006), which persist until the chemical stratification

disappears through entrainment.When Bc < B < 1, thermal buoyancy is sufficient to

maintain local thermochemical ‘bumps’ on the inter-

face (Figures 49(b) and 49(c)), whose maximumheight increases with increasing Ra and decreasingB (Le Bars and Davaille, 2004a; McNamara and

Zhong, 2004; Cottrell et al., 2004; Jaupart et al.,2007). If the lower layer is thin enough, it can break

up and form stable ‘ridges’ and ‘piles’ (Hansen andYuen, 1988; Tackley 1998, 2002; Table 1). The max-imum height of the thermochemical bumps is the

height of ‘neutral’ buoyancy, where local composi-tional buoyancy is just balanced by local thermalbuoyancy (LeBars and Davaille, 2004a; Kumagai

et al., 2007). Upon reaching this level, the dome can,depending on its internal Rayleigh number, either

stagnate or collapse. This generates very complicatedmorphologies (Figure 50).

Relevance of the experiments to the deep mantle: pressure

dependence of B. The laboratory experiments span wellthe parameter space of the mantle, except in onerespect: the depth dependence of the physical prop-

erties. This can be a problem since in the mantle, B

could vary with pressure (see Chapter 2.06), hence-

forth depth, because of two effects: (1) the thermalexpansion coefficient � varies with depth (e.g.,

Tackley, 1998; Montague and Kellogg, 2000;Hansen and Yuen, 2000), and/or (2) the density con-trast of compositional origin ��X varies with depthsince the two materials have different compressibil-ities (Tan and Gurnis, 2005; Samuel and Bercovici,2006).

1. The interface stability is determined by theability of the thermal density contrast across theinterface to overcome the compositional density con-trast. The former should therefore be calculatedusing the value of � at the interface depth, and wedo not expect Bc to vary significantly (see discussionin LeBars and Davaille (2004a)). This is indeed con-firmed by Figure 48, where both the numericalsimulation results using a depth-dependent � andlaboratory experiments collapse on the same dia-gram. In the mantle, � decreases with increasingdepth (see Chapter 2.06), which, for a given composi-tional density contrast, has two effects onthermochemical convection. First, the regime of agiven two-layer system will change with the locationof the interface (Davaille, 1999b), from doming in themid-mantle to stratified just above the CMB. Second,any dome starting deep in the mantle will gain buoy-ancy as it rises, which might enhance its velocity(LeBars and Davaille, 2004b).

2. Now, Si-enriched (i.e., denser) compositionswould also induce a lower compressibility of thedense anomaly compared to the surrounding mantle,implying an increase of the compositional densityexcess with decreasing depth (Samuel andBercovici, 2006; Tan and Gurnis, 2005). Therefore,although Si-enriched thermochemical domes couldfully develop and rise toward the surface if B < Bc

initially, upon reaching the level of neutral buoyancythey would stagnate and spread under it. If this levelis significantly higher than the initial interface, largeand well-formed plume heads could therefore stag-nate at various depths of the lower mantle (Samueland Bercovici, 2006). If the neutral buoyancy level isaround the initial interface depth, tabular less viscouspiles with steep vertical walls could form (Tan andGurnis, 2005). This is the only way to generate lessviscous active ridges or piles.

Stability of the continental lithosphere. Combining stabi-lity analysis and experiments, Cottrell et al. (2004)and Jaupart et al. (2007) studied the stability of thecooling continental lithosphere (see Chapters 7.07 and6.05), a thin, compositionally lighter, but also moreviscous, layer on top of an (quasi)-infinite mantle. Forthis combination of transient cooling from above,

Figure 50 ‘Failing’ dome: A thermochemical dome was

generated on a flat heater with a constant power. Initially theorange denser material was in a thin layer at the bottom of

the tank. The green lines are the isotherms. Courtesy of

Ichiro Kumagai and Kei Kurita.

142 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 55: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

small depth ratio a and large viscosity ratio , twotypes of oscillatory instabilities are obtained, depend-ing on the value of B (Jaupart et al., 2007). Inparticular, for 0.275 < B <�0.5, oscillations are ver-tical and the lithosphere could grow by entrainmentof chemically denser material from the astheno-sphere. These studies further suggest that thelithosphere could have developed in a state nearthat of instability with different thicknesses depend-ing on its intrinsic buoyancy.

Diversity of mantle upwellings. As described by Itoand van Keken in Chapter 7.09, hot spots and mantleupwellings present a large range of different signa-tures, which are difficult to reconcile with one singleorigin: there are probably different kinds of hot spotsand upwellings in the mantle. According to Table 1and Figure 49, this diversity could be explainedby the coexistence of the different regimes ofthermochemical convection in a compositionally het-erogeneous mantle which convects today primarilyon one layer (e.g., Davaille, 1999; Davaille et al.,2005). According to Section 7.03.7.3, these thermo-chemical upwellings would develop primarily awayfrom downwellings (e.g., Gonnermann et al., 2004;McNamara and Zhong, 2004), that is, in two mantle‘boxes’ separated by the circum-Pacific subductionzones (e.g., Davaille et al., 2002; McNamara andZhong, 2005).

Then, long-lived hot spots could be due toplumes anchored on the topography of a dense(B > 0.5) basal layer, which could also develop pilesand ridges. Scaling laws based on laboratory experi-ments (Davaille, 1999a, 1999b; Davaille et al., 2002;Jellinek and Manga, 2004) suggest that plumesanchored in D0 could develop for ��X > 0.6%, andthat they could survive hundreds of millions ofyears, depending on the spatial extent and magni-tude of the anchoring chemical heterogeneity(Davaille et al., 2002; Gonnermann et al., 2002;Jellinek and Manga, 2002, 2004). Such plumescould therefore produce much longer-lived hotspots than the transient plumes observed experi-mentally in isochemical convection (Figure 27).However, plume and piles longevity does not neces-sarily imply spatial fixity: plumes and their anchorscould be advected by large-scale flow associatedwith strong downwellings such as subducting plates(Tan et al., 2002; Davaille et al., 2002; McNamaraand Zhong, 2004).

On the other hand, ‘superswells’, hot spot clustersand large seismic slow anomalies in the deepmantle could be due to doming of a compositionally

denser layer with B < 0.5. Then, according to [27],thermochemical instabilities with temperature anoma-lies 300–500 K could be produced at the base of themantle by compositional density heterogeneities of0.3–0.6%. If viscosity depends only on temperature,the instabilities would then be 10–3000 times lessviscous than the bulk mantle, and should thereforehave the form of cavity plumes. According to [26],the thickness of the dense less viscous layer fromwhich they come must be less than 200–700 km. Thescaling laws of Le Bars and Davaille (2004a, 2004b)predict velocities �5–20 cm yr�1, radius �500–1000 km, spacing �2000–3500 km, and cyclicity�100–200 My for cavity plumes at the base of themantle. Moreover, heat flux could vary by as muchas 200% both laterally and spatially on those sametime and length scales (Davaille et al., 2003; Namikiand Kurita, 2003; Le Bars and Davaille, 2004b). Notethat the spacing predicted being much smaller thanthe typical size of a mantle ‘box’, several instabilitiesshould be observed in each box.

One fundamental question now remains: howmight the large-scale circulation created by platetectonics influence the different regims describedabove, and especially their time dependence? Cancyclic doming be maintained in such a flow?Experiments including plate-scale motions are nowneeded.

7.03.9.2.2 Entrainment and mixingEntrainment from an interface. Olson’s experiments(1984) on two-layer convection established thatentrainment at low Reynolds number can indeedoccur, and that viscous stresses can substitute forinertial instabilities as a mixing mechanism. Theentrainment occurs in two steps: first, the thermalheterogeneities at the interface induce circulationsin the two layers; then the viscous drag due to thoseconvective motions becomes sufficient to overcomethe negative buoyancy forces due to the stable che-mical density gradient, and thin tendrils of materialare entrained (Figure 51(a); Sleep, 1988; Lister,1989). The entrainment rate and the filament thick-ness depend on the intensity of convection, itsgeometry, the viscosity ratio, and the buoyancyratio: the more stable the fluid, the harder it is toentrain. A significant entrainment corresponds also toa cusp height greater than a critical value comparableto the thickness of the thermal boundary layer abovethe interface (Jellinek and Manga, 2004). Scaling lawshave been derived (Davaille 1999a, 1999b; Davaille

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 143

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 56: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

et al., 2002; Jellinek and Manga, 2002, 2004) whichexplain the data well (e.g., Figure 51(c)).

Stirring. The mixing pattern in thermochemicalconvection (Figure 52) is very complex, and stillpoorly characterized since convection creates com-positional heterogeneities with two different typicalsizes and topologies: (1) thin filaments generated bymechanical entrainment across the interface, leadingto the development of ‘marble cake’ structures inboth reservoirs, even though they can remain dyna-mically separated for a long time and (2) domes, andblobs encapsulated within them, are generated byinstabilities.

Experimental limitation: species diffusion. The geody-namical irrelevance of surface tension effects requiresthe use of miscible fluids in the laboratory. Therefore,

chemical diffusion becomes a problem when the ratioof chemical to thermal diffusivity (the Lewis number)Le¼D/� is too small. In the mantle, this ratio is >109.In the laboratory experiments reported here, it wasalways greater than 1000. Even then, chemical diffu-sion becomes important when convection is slow (cf.Section 7.03.9.1), and the mechanism of entrainmentacross the interface then switches to advection-enhanced diffusion (see the discussion in Davaille(1999a), and gray area in Figure 51(b)). Another pro-blem arises when three-component solutions are used(e.g., waterþ saltþNatrosol) in which the two dis-solved species (e.g., salt and Natrosol) do not diffuseat the same speed. Then, if the more viscous layer isinitially the upper layer (i.e., the layer with no salt is

Thermalconduit

(a)

(b)

Layer 2

Layer 1

100

10–1

10–2

10–3 10–2 10–1 100 101 102

Ent

rain

men

t rat

e, Q

+ Q

C

γ/B

Denser coreof the plume

Figure 51 (a) Sketch of a thermochemical plume. (b)

Volumetric entrainment rate of a thermochemical plume

divided by the convective scale as a function of g/B. Thecircles represent the experimental measurements, while the

solid line stands for the theoretical scaling. The shaded area

shows the domain where salt diffusion becomes important.

From Davaille A, Girard F, and Le Bars M (2002) How toanchor plumes in a convecting mantle? Earth and Planetary

Science Letters 203: 62–634.

(a)

(b)

(c)

Figure 52 Entrainment in compositional plumes (a, b) and

thermochemical domes (c) by viscous coupling. (a) Low

viscosity ratio: stirring within the plume head follows a vortexring structure. (b) high viscosity ratio: stirring within the head

is chaotic. (c) Mixing pattern in whole layer thermochemical

convection. The lower layer, initially denser and more

viscous, is dyed with fluoresceine. The experimental tank isilluminated by a laser sheet. After three cycles, the two layers

are still not mixed, but one can distinguish filaments and

blobs of dark, light fluid within the viscous domes. The thinfilaments were entrained by viscous coupling while the blobs

were encapsulated when the viscous dome collapsed upon

cooling. Since the blobs are lighter, they are bursting up

through the viscous fluid as Rayleigh–Taylor instabilities.(B¼ 0.30; Ra¼2.7� 107; a¼ 0.3; ¼ 175). (b) From Kumagai

I (2002) On the anatomy of mantle plumes: Effect of the

viscosity ratio on entrainment and stirring. Earth and

Planetary Science Letters 198: 211–224. (c) From Davaille A,Le Bars M, and Carbonne C (2003) Thermal convection in a

heterogeneous mantle. Comptes Rendus De L Academie

Des Sciences Geosciences 335(1): 141–156.

144 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 57: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

the layer with the most Natrosol), salt-Natrosol fin-gers develop, even before the onset of thermalconvection. This phenomenon, well known in thermo-haline convection, changes drastically the physics andthe entrainment rate at the interface. This led Davaille(1999a, 1999b) to discard those experiments. Thiscould also explain the results of Namiki (2003), whoobserved, using Natrosol solutions, that the interfacialentrainment rate when the more viscous layer was onthe top was different than when it was at the bottom.

7.03.9.3 Interaction of a Plume with aDensity and/or Viscosity Interface

This situation is of interest for the mantle since the660-km depth seismic discontinuity corresponds tothe phase transition from the spinel phase at lowpressure to perovskite at higher pressure (seeChapter 2.06). Although this endothermic phase tran-sition probably cannot stratified mantle convection, itis sufficient to delay flow (see Chapters 7.02 and 7.05).Moreover, the perovskite phase is also 3–100 timesstiffer than the upper mantle phases.

Laboratory experiments coupled to numericalmodelling have shown that a viscosity jump alone issufficient to modify the shape of an upwelling compo-sitional plume, the head of which becomes elongatedas it crosses the discontinuity from the stiffer lowermantle to the less viscous upper mantle (Manga et al.,1993). For sufficently large viscosity contrast, theplume head can even accelerate so much in theupper mantle that it becomes disconnected from theplume tail, which aggregates at the interface and formsa second plume ‘head’ (Bercovici and Mahoney, 1994).If the plume is compositionally heterogeneous, segre-gation can occur at the interface and the two headevents then have different geochemical signatures(Kumagai and Kurita, 2000). These phenomenawould explain well the emplacement timing and thegeochemical data at Ontong Java Plateau (Bercoviciand Mahoney, 1994; Kumagai and Kurita, 2000).

Kumagai et al. (2007) extended the previous studiesto thermal plumes and investigated the interactionbetween a lower-layer thermal plume and an innerinterface. The interaction mode depends on the localbuoyancy number (BL: the ratio of the stabilizingchemical buoyancy to the plume thermal buoyancyat the interface), Ra, and . For BL < 0.6, the ‘pass-through’ mode develops, whereby a large volume ofthe lower material rises through the upper layer andreaches the top surface, since the plume head has alarge thermal buoyancy compared to the stabilizing

density contrast between the two layers. WhenBL > 0.6, the ‘rebirth’ mode occurs, where the thermalplume ponds and spreads under the chemical bound-ary and secondary thermal plumes are generated fromthe interface. Depending on the magnitude of BL,these plumes can entrain a significant amount oflower-layer material upwards by viscous coupling.

7.03.10 Mid-Ocean Ridges and WaxTectonics

The study of ridges and accretion is challengingbecause it involves processes which involves bothbrittle fracture and ductile flow, which is quite diffi-cult to study numerically. For example, currentnumerical simulations still cannot reproduce thecoupled fluid–solid deformation processes responsi-ble for microplates at mid-ocean ridges. On the otherhand, published results from a wax analog modelyielded the first observations of overlapping spread-ing centers (OSCs), morphological precursors tomicroplates, before their discovery on the seafloor(Oldenburg and Brune, 1972). Two main questionshave been tackled with laboratory experiments: theability of a buoyant mantle upwelling to break thecrust, and the morphology of ridges.

7.03.10.1 Can a Buoyant Mantle UpwellingGenerate Sufficient Stress to Rupture aBrittle Crust?

Using surface layers of various brittle and visco-elas-tic materials, Ramberg and Sjostrom (1973) studiedwhether a relatively stiff crustal layer could break intension above a buoyant diapir and become displacedlaterally in a manner simulating the breakup ofPangea and the wandering continents. For bettervisualization of the deformation, the material wasinitially dyed in different colored layers. The modelwas then centrifuged for several minutes at accelera-tions up to 3000g. All experiments show the breakupof the brittle layer by the diapir head. However, thematerial rheology was not sufficently well character-ized to permit a quantitative study, or to investigatethe morphology of the ridges.

7.03.10.2 Morphology of Ridges

Ridge morphology has been studied using paraffinwax as an analog mantle material: solid wax simulatesbrittle mantle and molten material simulates the

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 145

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 58: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

region that deforms as a viscous fluid (Oldenburg andBrune, 1972, 1975; Ragnarsson et al., 1996). The mol-

ten wax was frozen at the surface by a flow of cold air.Then the solid crust was pulled apart with constant

velocity and a rift was formed separating the crust

into two solid plates (Figure 53). In this case, thesolid wax thickness increases as the square root of the

distance to the ridge (Oldenburg and Brune, 1975), inagreement with theory (Parker and Oldenburg,

1973).Oldenburg and Brune (1972) first observed that a

straight rift initially perpendicular to the pulling

direction evolved into a pattern consisting of straight

segments interrupted by faults orthogonal to the riftand parallel to the pulling direction (Figure 54). The

ability of a wax to generate orthogonal transformfaults depends on the ratio of the shear strength of

its solid phase to the resistive stresses acting along thetransform fault: if the latter exceed the former, a

breakup of the solid near the transform fault wallshould occur (Oldenburg and Brune, 1975).

Ragnarsson et al. (1996) and Bodenschatz et al.

(1997) studied the phase diagram in more detail,

investigating the rift structure as a function of the

pulling speed for two different waxes. The regime

diagram was found to depend critically on the rheol-

ogy of the wax:

1. In the first case (Shell Wax 120), the solid layercould be divided in two regions because the paraffin

wax undergoes a solid–solid phase transition: a colder

phase, hard and brittle, where strain is mostly

accomodated by crack formation during extension;

and a warmer ductile phase, where strain is accomo-

dated primarily by viscous flow. This wax gave birth

to the different regimes shown in Figure 55

(Ragnarsson et al., 1996), but the orthogonal trans-

form faults observed by Oldenburg and Brune (1972,

1975) were never observed. At slow spreading rates,

the rift, initially perpendicular to the spreading

direction, was stable (Figure 55(a)). Above a critical

spreading rate, a ‘spiky’ rift developed with fracture

zones almost parallel to the spreading direction

(Figure 55(b)). At yet higher spreading rates a sec-

ond transition from the spiky rift to a zigzag pattern

occurred (Figure 55(c)). With further increase of the

spreading rate the zigzags steepened (Figure 55(d)).

In Figure 55(a) and 55(b), the rift was frozen,

whereas in Figures 55(c) and 55(d), molten fluid

reached the surface. In the zigzag regime, the angle

of the interface with respect to the spreading direc-

tion can be described by a simple geometrical model,

since the problem is dominated by only two veloci-

ties, the externally given spreading rate (pulling

speed) and the internally selected maximal growth

Anchor plates Wax crustCC

D

Molten wax

Fluorescent lamps

Cool air

Rift

x

y

Figure 53 Experimental setup. The tank is heated frombelow at constant temperature and cooled from above by a

constant flow of air. Before each run, a layer of wax is allowed

to grow on the surface until thermal equilibrium is reached.

Two skimmers embedded in the solid wax are attached to athreaded rod which is driven by a stepping motor. The rift is

initiated with a straight cut through the wax, perpendicular to

the spreading direction. Divergence at this cut causes liquidwax to rise into the rift and solidify. Illumination from below

permits to image the plate thickness at the rift from above

using a video camera. From Ragnarsson R, Ford JL,

Santangelo CD, and Bodenschatz E (1996) Rifts in spreadingwax layers. Physical Review Letters 76: 3456–9.

Figure 54 Transmission image of transform faults,

obtained in Shell Wax Callista 158 and with a spreading rate

of 78 mm s�1. Image size is 9 mm. From Bodenschatz E,Gemelke N, Carr J, and Ragnarsson R (1997) Rifts in

spreading wax layers: An analogy to the mid-ocean rift

formation. Localization Phenomena and Dynamics of Brittle

and Granular Systems. Columbia University.

146 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 59: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

velocity of the solidifying fronts. When the spreading

rate exceeds the solidification speed, the interface has

to grow at an angle to keep up. The experimental

data on the angles agree well with this model.2. In the second case (Shell Wax Callista 158), the

solid phase is more brittle (Bodenschtaz et al., 1997;

Oblath et al., 2004). Three distinct morphological

regimes were observed. At slow spreading rates, a

straight rift is stable and forms a topographic low.

At moderate rates, it becomes unstable and OSCs and

microplates form, evolve, and die on the ridge, which

has little or no relief. At high spreading rates, the

microplates lose their internal rigidity and become

transform faults at the ridge (Figure 54), as pre-

viously described by Oldenburg and Brune (1972,

1975). The ridge corresponds to a topographic high

(Bodenschtaz et al., 1997; Oblath et al., 2004). Katz et al.

(2005) focused on the formation of microplates

(Figure 56). In wax, like on Earth, they originate

from OSCs. The latter nucleate predominantly on

sections of obliquely spreading rift, where the rift

normal is about 45� from the spreading direction.

These experiments are very interesting for pat-tern formation, and show striking geometrical

similarities with what is observed on the ocean

floor. However, their relevance to mid-ocean ridge

systems is still questionable for two reasons: first,

dynamic similarity does not obtain, since the viscos-

ity contrast between the solid and the liquid wax is

much greater than the viscosity contrast across the

solid lithosphere. Experiments involving wax are

therefore probably more relevant to the dynamics

of ice satellites (e.g., Manga and Sinton, 2004) or of

lava lakes. Second, the physics of the wax experi-

ments reported above is far from being understood.

For example, the influence of latent heat effects on

the dynamics of the wax systems remains unknown.

To apply their results to the Earth mid-ocean ridges

system, Oldenburg and Brune (1972, 1975) neglected

these effects and proposed a semi-quantitative theory

based on shrinkage and the mechanical properties of

wax. The more recent experiments, although they

very nicely showed the diversity of rift morphologies,

were not able to relate them quantitatively to the wax

cooling, nor to its rheology. So a quantitative

a b c d

20.0 cm

Figure 55 Different regimes as the spreading velocity

increases. From Ragnarsson R, Ford JL, Santangelo CDand Bodenschatz E (1996) Rifts in spreading wax layers.

Physical Review Letters 76 3456–3459.

Figure 56 Time series of images showing a growing microplate: (a) 15 s, (b) 30 s, (c) 60 s. Green arrows show the direction

of spreading of the main plates and the direction of microplate rotation. In red, the spreading ridge and the pseudo-faults pair.The inner ones were generated with the kinematic model of Shouten et al. (1993). From Katz RF, Ragnarsson R, and

Bodenschatz E (2005) Tectonic Microplates in a Wax Model of Sea Floor Spreading. New Journal of Physics 7, doi:10.1088/

1367-2630/7/1/037.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 147

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 60: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

understanding of lithosphere rifting remains to beachieved, and will require a better knowledge offluid rheology.

7.03.11 Subduction-RelatedExperiments

The subduction of oceanic lithosphere is the mostprominant signature of thermal convection in theEarth’s mantle. Subducting plates constitute thecold downwellings of mantle convection, which sinkinto the mantle because of their negative buoyancy.Subduction involves a wide variety of physical andchemical processes: earthquakes, volcanism (dehy-dratation, melting, and melting migration), phasetransformations, thermal effects, mantle circulation,and plate motion. They are reviewed in detail byKing in Chapter 7.08. We focus here on the experi-mental work which has been restricted to the study ofthe mantle-scale dynamics of subduction, namely therelations between motion of subducted slabs, mantleflow, and back-arc spreading (Figure 57). Laboratorymodels of these phenomena have three advantages:they are inherently 3-D; they do not suffer fromlimited computational resolution of the temperatureand velocity fields; and it is easy to work with strongviscosity variations.

7.03.11.1 Ingredients for Subduction

It has been long recognized that cold plates are notproduced by isoviscous convection, and that thestrong temperature dependence of mantle viscosityis required (e.g., Torrance and Turcotte, 1971), as we

showed in Sections 7.03.5 and 7.03.6. Turner (1973)illustrated this idea using glycerine in a tank cooledfrom above, in which convective overturn was forcedby a stream of bubbles of cold CO2 released from dryice at the bottom of the tank. Surface cooling thenproduced a thin viscous sheet which was driven awayfrom regions of upward convection, and thenplunged steeply into the less viscous interior, main-taining its identity as it did so. Jacoby (1970, 1973,1976) and Jacoby and Schmeling (1982) studied thegravitational sinking of cold viscous high-densitylithosphere into asthenosphere. Jacoby first studiedthe mode of sinking of a heavy elastic rubber sheetinto water under isothermal conditions withoutactive ‘mantle’ convection (Jacoby, 1973). Later, heused the same paraffin as Oldenburg and Brune(1975) to include the effects of thermal convection.The paraffin was heated from below above its melt-ing point, and cooled from above below its meltingpoint. It therefore formed a thin solid dense skin ontop of the fluid layer. However, the skin could not begenerated or melted at the same rate as that of thesinking, preventing real plate tectonics behavior(Jacoby, 1976). Moreover, surface tension preventedthick skins from sinking by themselves. However,sinking could be initiated by loading the edge of theskin or by wetting its surface with molten paraffin(Figure 58). The heavy skin first bends with a radiusof curvature which depends on the skin thickness,then accelerates down the trench as the portionwithin the mantle increases. Upon interacting withthe tank bottom, the skin can ‘fold’ and the trench caneven ‘roll back’ in the oceanward direction(Figure 58). Convection cells caused by localizedheating at the bottom of the tank do not perturbsignificantly the slab’s evolution. Although these pio-neering experiments were only ‘semi-quantitative’(Jacoby, 1976), they already reproduced most fea-tures of subduction (down-dip motion and roll back,3-D, time dependence, folding on the box bottom,etc.), as well as highlighting the difficulties that quan-titative experiments have to overcome (subductioninitiation, surface tension effects, etc.).

Kincaid and Olson (1987) designed experiments tofurther study the lateral migration of slabs and theirpenetration through the transition zone (Figure 4).Cold, negatively buoyant molded slabs of concen-trated sucrose solution were introduced into a moredilute, two-layer sucrose solution representing theupper and lower mantle. The transition zone wasmodeled by a step increase in both density and visc-osity. The initial setup consisted of two horizontal

Back-arc basin

Overriding Plate

Mantle wedge Trench

Subducting plate ρs, ηs

Ridgeboundary

i

VU

VE

VR

660 km discontinuity

Upper mantle ρU, η0

Lower mantle ρL, η L

VP

VT

Figure 57 Sketch of a subduction zone with the main

features studied in the laboratory. VP: surface plate velocity;VT: retrograde trench velocity; VR: retrograde slab velocity;

VE: downdip velocity; VU: sinking velocity; i: dip angle; d:

slab thickness, H: upper layer thickness.

148 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 61: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

plates separated by a trench gap, with one plateattached to a dipping slab, simulating a developingsubduction zone with an overriding plate(Figure 57). The trailing end (‘ridge’) of the slabwas either locked (VP¼ 0), or free to move alongwith the plate. Besides the Prandtl number [2],important dimensionless numbers are the ratio ofslab thickess to mantle depth /H and the ratios�S/�U and �S/�L of the slab viscosity to those of theupper and lower mantle. It was necessary to have �S/�L > 103 to maintain a tabular shape during subduc-tion. No velocity is imposed and the slab sinks underits own weight. This phenomenon can be describedby an effective Rayleigh number, defined in terms ofthe slab/upper layer density contrast �S��U:

RaS ¼�S – �Uð ÞgH 3

��U½28�

In the experiments, RaS� 1.2� 105. On the otherhand, the style of slab penetration through the den-sity discontinuity depends on the ratio of the slabbuoyancy in the upper and the lower mantle:

BS ¼�S – �L

�S – �U½29�

Homogeneous fluids correspond to BS¼ 1.0, whilenegative values correspond to strong stratification.In agreement with the numerical study byChristensen and Yuen (1984), Kincaid and Olson(1987) found three modes of slab penetration(Figure 59(a)). Regime I, in which BS��0.2, corre-sponds to strong stratification and virtually no slabpenetration. In the intermediate regime II(�0.2� BS� 0.5), there is partial slab penetrationand formation of a root beneath the interface. When

BS > 0.5, the stratification is weak enough to permitthe slab to sink into the lower layer with minordeformation (regime III). Retrograde slab motionand trench migration occurred in nearly every case,being greatest in regime I (Figure 59(b)), episodic inregime II, and nearly absent in regime III, especiallywhen �L/�U is around 1. Moreover, the episodicity oftrench rollback is related to the interaction of the slabwith the density stratification, and is greatest in thecase of a fixed ridge. The complexity of the time-dependent slab motion, both downdip and retro-grade, and its interaction with any bottomboundary, made it difficult to derive scaling laws todescribe subduction. Work in the last 20 years hasaimed at obtaining those scalings, using experimentswhere more parameters were controlled.

7.03.11.2 The Surface Story and theInitiation of Subduction

Subduction initiates within the lithosphere and pro-duces large-scale tectonic features. The first analogmodeling of tectonic processes probably dates back to1815 when Sir James Hall attempted to model foldsin geological strata, using layered beds of clay andclothes. Numerous experiments have been per-formed since to reproduce lithosphere and crustaldynamics. It is beyond the scope of this chapter toreview them all (for recent reviews, see Schellart(2002)). We shall describe here only studies relevantto the nucleation and evolution of subduction.

Lithospheric processes necessitate taking intoaccount the complex rheology of the lithosphere.Shemenda (1992, 1993) considered the subduction

Figure 58 Series of photographs of two sinking paraffin skins, taken at approximately 3 s intervals with a longer interval

between 5 and 8. Changes in slab dip, retrograde motion, and folding on the bottom boundary are clearly seen. From JacobyWR (1976) Paraffin model experiment of plate tectonics. Tectonophysics 35: 103–113.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 149

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 62: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

of an elasto-plastic lithosphere (a mixture of powderand hydrocarbons) into a low-viscosity astheno-sphere (water), driven by both horizontalgravitational sinking (i.e., plate/asthenosphere den-sity contrast) and an horizontal compressional forcedriven by a piston. However, subduction did notinitiate without the presence of pre-existing discon-tinuities. In this case, the horizontal compressionproduced buckling instabilities, then localization ofdeformation, leading to failure and eventually sub-duction of the lithosphere. Trench rollback was thenaccompanied by back-arc opening along pre-existingfaults. The lithosphere has also been modeled as asuccession of brittle and ductile layers of differentstrengths and rheologies (e.g., Davy and Cobbold,1991). Following this approach, Pinet and Cobbold(1992) and Pubellier and Cobbold (1996) studied theconsequences of oblique subduction, that is, the par-titioning between down-dip motion and transversemotion along faults. They used a sand mixture tomodel the brittle upper crust, silicone putty for theductile lower crust/upper mantle, and glucose syrupfor the asthenosphere.

Faccenna et al. (1996, 1999) and Becker et al. (1999)use the same layered system to study the behavior ofan ocean-continent plate system subjected to

compressional strain over geological timescales.

Compressional stress was achieved by displacing a

piston at constant velocity perpendicular to the plate

margin (Figure 60). The coupled interface between

oceanic and continental plates is found to resist a

rapid surge of compressional stress and the shorten-

ing is accomodated by undulations within the ocean

plate (Martinod and Davy, 1994). But if the system

evolves under a low compressive strain rate (slow

ridge-push), the oceanic plate becomes unstable to

(b)

l

ll

lll

Overriding plate

MarkerUpper mantle

660 km discontinuity

Slab

(a)

Figure 59 (a) Styles of slab penetration through a density discontinuity: I, slab deflection with Bs��0.2; II, partial slab

penetration and formation of a root beneath the interface with Bs�0; III, complete slab penetration for Bs > 0.5. (b) Trench

migration and retrograde subduction with the fixed ridge boundary condition. The dye streak indicates the flow pattern in theback arc edge. From Kincaid C and Olson P (1987) An experimental study of subduction and slab migration. Journal of

Geophysical Research 92: 13832–13840.

Continent Oceanic plate

Lower siliconelayers

Upper siliconelayers

Glucose Syrup

Sand layers

Piston

Figure 60 Four layers setup to study the initiation of

subduction. From Faccenna C, Giardini D, Davy P, andArgentieri A (1999) Initiation of subduction at Atlantic-type

margins: Insights from laboratory experiments. Journal of

Geophysical Research 104: 2749–2766.

150 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 63: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

RTI and subduction develops (Faccenna et al. 1999).The trench is then first localized at the ocean-con-tinent boundary because of the lateral heterogeneitythere. The dynamics of the system can therefore becontrolled by the ‘buoyancy number’ F, the ratio ofdriving buoyant to resisting viscous forces (e.g.,Houseman and Gubbins, 1997):

F �S – �U; S; �S; Uð Þ ¼ �S – �Uð Þg2S

�SU¼ �

U=S½30�

where U is the imposed horizontal velocity, and �is the RTI growth rate for a more viscous slab(see Section 7.03.4). If F(�S��U,S,�S,U) < 1, theRTI is inhibited and the oceanic plate is deformedby folding. Subduction initiates if F(S) > 1, that is,if the negative buoyancy force of the oceanicplate exceeds the viscous resisting force of themodel lithosphere. Faccenna et al. (1999) furthershow that the passive margin behavior is not sensitiveto the high shear strength of the brittle layer but onlyto the resistance of the ductile layer. So subductionintiation is essentially a viscous fluid process. Sinceits growth rate � depends on the inverse of the slabviscosity (which is high), it is a slow process.However, once the developed slab sinks into theless viscous mantle, its style and dynamics are pre-dominantly governed by a buoyancy numberF(�S��U,H,�U,U) based on the viscosity and thethickness of the upper mantle (Becker et al., 1999).The velocity and angle of subduction and the rate oftrench rollback are found to be strongly time depen-dent and to increase exponentially over tens ofmillions years before the slab interacts with the660 km discontinuity.

7.03.11.3 Mantle Flow Induced by a ColdRigid Slab

The use of rigid slabs enables one to maintain con-stant along the slab the dip angle i and the slabmaterial velocity VE, and to control easily both VE

and the velocity VR of retrograde motion either byvarying the trench velocity VT or the time variationof the dip angle di/dt (Figure 60). In this setup, allplate motions are kinematically determined. Theycan be scaled to the mantle through the Peclet num-ber (eqn [4]) Pe¼VE./�, which compares advectiveheat transport and conductive transport. For mantlesubduction, 10�Pe� 400. This means that the slabwill have reached 660 km depth before having lostmuch heat.

7.03.11.3.1 Generation of seismic

anisotropy

Motivated by the growing body of evidence that

trench rollback could be associated with a particular

pattern of seismic anisotropy (see Chapters 1.16 and

2.16 volume 2), whereby the a-axis of olivine crystals

would align parallel to the trench oceanward of the

slab and turn around its edges (e.g., Russo and Silver,

1994), Buttles and Olson (1998) used small cylinders

(whiskers) suspended in a viscous fluid as an analog

to olivine crystals, and studied their orientation in

vertical and horizontal cross-sections in the vicinity

of a subducting slab. The slab was simulated by a

rigid Plexiglas plate whose dip angle, down-dip

motion, and rollback were controlled independently

(Figure 60), and the mantle was modeled with

Newtonian corn syrup. The whole system was iso-

thermal. They show that trench-parallel olivine

a-axis orientation in the seaward-side mantle is

indeed controlled by the amount of slab rollback,

and that orientations in the mantle wedge depend

upon slab dip angle.

7.03.11.3.2 Mantle flow and thermal

evolution of the slabKincaid and Griffiths (2003, 2004) used the same

kind of setup to study the variability of flow and

temperature in subduction zones. The slab was

made of a composite laminate cooled to a prescribed

temperature before the experiment, and containing

temperature sensors to monitor its thermal evolu-

tion as it is forced into an isothermal tank of hotter

glucose syrup. The thermal boundary layers devel-

oping in the fluid were visualized by a Moire

technique and the flow field measured using tiny

air bubbles and PIV (Figure 61). The experiments

Pe ranged between 80 and 450. The mantle return

flow induced by pure longitudinal sinking creates

two cells, one oceanward and one in the wedge

(Figure 61), where the velocity can reach 40% of

the slab downdip speed. Rollback subduction

induces flow both around and beneath the sinking

slab (Figure 25), with larger velocities in the wedge

and flow focused toward the center of the plate.

These 3-D flows strongly influence the thermal

evolution and structure of the plate: they speed up

slab reheating. Moreover, the highest slab reheating

occurs along the slab centerline when there is roll-

back, while it occurs along the edges for pure

longitudinal sinking.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 151

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 64: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

7.03.11.4 Coupled Mantle-Slab FluidSystem

These experiments consider the interactions betweenthe mantle and a mature, purely viscous slab. Thesubduction is induced either by extruding a viscousslab with constant velocity and dip angle (e.g.,Figure 61), or by bending the tip of an horizontalslab and forcing it into the mantle until the slab sinksunder its own weight (e.g., Figure 57).

7.03.11.4.1 Fixed rollback velocity

These experiments were designed to further inves-tigate the interaction of a sinking slab with a densityand viscosity interface, mimicking the discontinuityat 660 km depth between the upper and lower man-tles (Kincaid and Olson, 1987) (Figures 62 and 63).The slab velocity and initial dip angle were thistime imposed. Griffiths and Turner (1988) injectedtabular slabs and cylindrical plumes vertically(VT¼ 0) onto a fluid interface under isothermal

conditions and determined the conditions underwhich folding of the slab or plume occurred.Mixtures of water and Golden Syrup were used tocontrol the viscosity and density of the slab and themantle layers. As in the experiments of folding on asolid surface (Cruickshank and Munson, 1981;Figure 64(a)), they found that folding occurs in acompressed slab when the ratio of its length to itswidth exceeds a critical value (�6). They also deter-mined the amount of fluid entrained within the foldsin the lower layer, and when this entrainment couldsufficiently reduce the buoyancy of the slab to pre-vent its sinking further in the lower mantle. Griffithset al. (1995) and Guillou-Frottier et al. (1995)extended these results to retreating slabs (VE andVT constant). Griffiths et al. (1995) used again iso-thermal mixtures of Golden Syrup and water so thattheir slab was between 1.5 and 50 times more vis-cous than their lower mantle. Guillou-Frottier et al.

Rigid stationaryoverriding plate Subducting

slabTank

stepper

Fluid

Tank motionBallbearing track

Slab m

otion

Figure 61 Typical experimental setup allowing to control

independently the trench velocity and the slab motion

(velocity and dip angle). The subducting slab can be either arigid plate mounted on a stepper (e.g., Buttles and Olson,

1998; Kincaid and Griffiths, 2003, 2004), or a viscous fluid

extruded at a constant rate from a thermostated reservoir(e.g., Guillou-Frottier et al., 1995; and Griffiths et al., 1995).

(a)

TBL

(b)

Ud

Wedge apex

Figure 62 Rigid slab experiments. (a, b) A cold rigid slab is introduced at constant velocity in the fluid, with no trench rollback. (a) The cold TBL developping around the slab is visualized with a Moire technique. (b) Corner flow motions in the mantle

wedge visualized with streaks. From Kincaid C and Griffiths RW (2004) Variability in flow and temperatures within mantle

subduction zones. Geochemistry, Geophysics, Geosystems 5: Q06002 (doi:10.1029/2003GC000666).

VT

Figure 63 Schematic sketch of subduction and slab

rollback-induced flow. Down-dip motion induces two

poloidal flow cells on each side of the slab (black arrows),while slab rollback expels oceanward mantle material into

the wedge, creating three toroidal flow cells, two around the

lateral slab edges, and one around the tip of the slab when

the slab has not reached yet the bottom of the box (or thedensity stratification).

152 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 65: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

(1995) used corn syrup, and extruded a very coldand viscous slab into their two-layer mantle, so that

the experiments Pe� 30–150 and the slab was 102–104

more viscous than the lower mantle. Both sets of

experiments highlighted the essential role of trenchrollback, in additon to BS and �L/�U, in the slabpenetration regime. Increasing trench rollback

enhances slab flattening on the interface (Figures59 and 65). Increased resistance in the lower mantle

also promotes folds and piles (Figure 64(b)), whichcan either stagnate in the lower mantle or sink to thebottom (Guillou-Frottier et al., 1995). The ampli-

tude of the observed folds is well predicted bynumerically determined scaling laws, which also

predict amplitudes (400–500 km) consistent withtomographic images of slabs beneath some subduc-tion zones (Ribe et al., 2007). On the other hand,

when the slab is not too viscous, RTIs have time todevelop from the slab resting on the interface, and to

sink into the lower mantle (Figure 65; Griffithset al., 1995). When, however, the slab materialreaches the depth of neutral buoyancy, it will spread

at this level as a gravity current (Kerr and Lister,1987; Lister and Kerr, 1989). Slab deformation

modes therefore finally depend on three parameters:the slab to mantle viscosity ratio �S/�L, the ratio ofsinking (Stokes) velocities in the upper and lower

mantle (�BS�U/�L), and the ratio of the slab’s hor-izontal velocity to its vertical velocity. As the latter

can change through time in Nature, a slab probablypasses through a number of different deformationmodes during its history.

7.03.11.4.2 Free rollback velocity

If rollback controls in part the slab deformation at

depth, what happens if the trench is free to move in

response to the mantle flow? A number of systematic

studies have recently been devoted to the dynamics

of a slab sinking under its own weight (Figure 66(a)).

Regardless of the boundary conditions, subduction is

always strongly time dependent. After initiation, sub-

duction accelerates as the mass of slab in the mantle

increases (slab-pull) while the slab dip is close to 90�.Then, subduction slows down after interaction with

the 660 km interface, reaching a steady state when

the slab spreads on the interface, followed by even-

tual penetration, accompanied by folding (Becker

et al., 1999; Funiciello et al., 2003, 2004, 2006;

Schellart, 2004a, 2004b, 2005). Besides, the amount

(a) (b)

Figure 64 (a) A sheet of viscous fluid poured on a surfacecan develop folds and form a pile (b) The same folding and

piling behavior is observed when a viscous slab sinking in

another viscous fluid encounters a viscosity and/or density

interface. Here the slab viscosity is 1000 times that of thelower layer. (a) From Ribe NM (2003) Periodic folding of

viscous sheets. Physical Review E 68: 036305; (b) from

Guillou-Frottier L, Buttles J, and Olson P (1995). Laboratoryexperiments on structure of subducted lithosphere. Earth

and Planetary Science Letters 133: 19–34.

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

Figure 65 Different regimes of slab interaction with a

viscosity/density interface for a slab which is between 3 and50 times more viscous than the lower layer. The trench

velocity increases from (a) to (c) and the viscosity contrast

from (c) to (d). From Griffiths RW, Hackney RI, and van der

Hilst RD (1995). A laboratory investigation of effects oftrench migration on the descent of subducted slabs. Earth

and Planetary Science Letters 133(1–2): 1–17.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 153

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 66: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

of trench and slab rollback depends on the degree of

lateral confinement of the flow (Funiciello et al., 2003,2004; Schellart, 2004a, 2005), and is much reduced in2-D or when the side walls are within 600 km of theslab edges (Funiciello et al., 2003). As in the experi-ments with rigid slabs (Buttles and Olson, 1998;Kincaid and Griffiths, 2003, 2004), slab rollbackinduces flow around the slab edges. The lateral flow

in turn forces the hinge line to adopt a convex shapetoward the direction of retreat (Funiciello et al., 2003;Schellart, 2004a; Figure 63). By varying the thick-ness, width, viscosity, and density of the slab andmantle, Bellahsen et al. (2005) observed three char-acteristic modes of subduction for a slab connected toa plate with a free ridge (Figures 11(b) and 11(d)): aretreating trench mode (mode I), a retreating trench

mode following a transient period of advancingtrench (mode II), and an advancing trench mode(mode III). The same modes are found when theplate velocity VP is fixed at the ridge (‘ridge push’;Funiciello et al., 2004; Schellart, 2005): a relativelylow VP results in relatively fast hinge-retreat VTwithbackward sinking of the slab and a backward draping

slab geometry (mode I). With increasing VP, hingemigration is relatively small, resulting in subverticalsinking of the slab and a folded slab piling geometry(mode II). For very high VP, the hinge migrates for-ward, resulting in a forward draping slab geometry.These three modes are characterized by different

partitioning of the subduction into plate and trench

motion. The lithospheric radius of curvature, whichdepends upon plate characteristics (stiffness and

thickness) and the mantle thickness, exerts a primarycontrol on the trench behavior. Moreover, the sub-duction velocity results from the balance between

acting and resisting forces, where lithospheric bend-ing represents 75–95% of the total resisting forces

(Bellahsen et al., 2006). Martinod et al. (2005) studiedhow ridges and plateaus on the subducting litho-sphere modify the subduction regime. Using feature

tracking image analysis, Funiciello et al. (2006)further investigated the influence of plate width andmantle viscosity/density on rollback and the induced

poloidal and toroidal components of the mantle cir-culation. The poloidal component is the response to

the viscous coupling between the slab motion and themantle, while the toroidal component is produced bylateral slab migration. The experiments show that

both components are important from the beginningof the subduction process, and strongly intermittent.

The experiments have therefore established thatmantle subduction is a strongly time-dependentand 3-D phenomenon. Hence, mantle flow in sub-

duction zones cannot be correctly described bymodels assuming a 2-D steady-state process.Subduction dynamics involve slab-pull, ridge-

push, but also trench rollback and interaction withthe 660 km depth discontinuity. All these effects

(a)Bent tip

Silicone putty

Glucose

–0.25

0

0.5

2.50

Retreating

Advancing

Time

Tre

nch

mot

ion

MODE ΙΙΙMODE ΙΙMODE Ι

(b)

(c)

ΙΙΙ

ΙΙ

Ι

Figure 66 (a) Experimental setup used by the Roma III group. A slab of silicone putty is spread horizontally on GlucoseSyrup. Subduction is initiated by forcing its tip 3 cm into the glucose. (b) Trench motion vs. time for the three modes of

subduction images in (c). From Bellahsen N, Faccenna C, and Funiciello F (2005) Dynamics of subduction and plate motion in

laboratory experiments: Insights into the ‘plate tectonics’ behavior of the Earth. Journal of Geophysical Research 110: B01401

(doi:10.1029/2004JB002999).

154 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 67: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

explain the diversity of slab deformation and sub-duction history observed in the laboratory and inNature (e.g., Kincaid and Olson, 1987; Guillou-Frottier et al., 1995; Griffiths et al., 1995; Faccennaet al., 2001; Schellart, 2004a). Despite the multipli-city of regimes, time-dependent trench rollback isthe most common occurrence, which explains wellthe formation of back-arc basins (e.g., Faccennaet al., 2001). The challenge now is to obtain scalinglaws to predict the complete regime diagram ofsubduction and the characteristics of each regime.This will require including thermal effects, andadressing the problem of lithospheric rheology.All the experiments which have been done so farused a slab with Newtonian rheology. However, thetrue ‘effective’ viscosity of the lithosphere is stillcontroversial. In the laboratory, it has been choseneither 103–104 times more viscous than the mantle(e.g., Olson and co-workers, Funiciello and co-workers) so that the slab retains its tabular shape,or only 10–100 times more viscous (e.g., Griffithsand co-workers, Schellart), which produced some-what different results. Another problem is toestimate the influence of surface tension, which isunavoidable in laboratory experiments with freesurfaces (Jacoby, 1976) and which must beaccounted for to obtain quantitative measurementsof the forces resisting subduction and laboratory-based scaling laws for trench motion that can beapplied to the mantle.

7.03.12 Conclusions

Quantitative analog laboratory experiments haveplayed an indispensable role in advancing the fieldof geodynamics since the earliest days of its exis-tence as a discipline. Reflecting on this history helpsone to understand more clearly what an experimen-tal approach has to offer. At the top of any list mustsurely be the discovery of new phenomena.Laboratory experiments have always been thesource of many of the most exciting new discoveriesin fluid mechanics generally, and geodynamics itselfoffers numerous examples: a partial list wouldinclude the convective planforms in a variable-visc-osity fluid, the diversity of thermal andcompositional plumes, the entrainment in plumes,and the different modes of subduction. A secondimportant contribution of the experimentalapproach is to the formation of influential new con-cepts and models. An obvious example here is the

classical ‘head plus tail’ picture of a mantle plume; it

is no exaggeration to say that this model had its

origin almost entirely in the remarkable laboratory

experiments of Whitehead and Luther (1975),

Olson and Singer (1985), and Griffiths (1986a)

among others, and in the beautiful photographic

images that came from them. A third important

role that laboratory experiments can play is to test

theories arrived at using other methods: one thinks

for example of the experiments performed by

Whitehead and Luther (1975) to test the linear

theory of the Rayleigh–Taylor instability.

Experimental tests are especially important when-

ever the theory in question involves assumptions of

an asymptotic nature, or whose validity is not

obvious.The rapid evolution of high-performance numer-

ical computing in recent years has provided still

another role for experimental geodynamics: that of

verifying and benchmarking complex numerical

codes for phenomena such as convection with tem-

perature-dependent viscosity (Busse et al., 1994),

subduction (Schmeling et al., 2004), and convection

with a chemical field (van Keken et al., 1997). Such

benchmarks are particularly important for 3-D time-

dependent flows with large variations in material

properties, which are still difficult to treat reliably

by numerical means. By the same token, the ability of

numerical models to deliver detailed representations

of 2-D and 3-D field variables has encouraged the

development of powerful new techniques for quanti-

tative flow visualization in the laboratory, such as the

observation of the temperature field using TLCs

(e.g., Rhee et al., 1984; Davaille et al., 2006), or the

determination of the velocity and stretching fields by

PIV (e.g., Adrian, 1991; Voth et al., 2002; Funiciello

et al., 2006).While the future of experimental geodynamics is

impossible to predict, it is not hard to identify some

critical scientific questions where an experimental

approach is likely to be fruitful. One is the nature of

entrainment and mixing between different mantle

reservoirs, which involves phenomena occurring on

short length scales and with little diffusion that are

hard to resolve numerically. A second is the genera-

tion of plate tectonics by mantle convection, which

cannot be understood in terms of traditional

Newtonian fluid mechanics. Modeling this process

in the laboratory will require new developments in

the characterization and experimental deployment of

fluids with complex rheology.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 155

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 68: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

References

Adrian RJ (1983) Laser velocimetry. In: Goldstein RJ (ed.), FluidMechanics Measurements, pp. 155–244. Washington:Hemisphere.

Adrian RJ (1991) Particle imaging techniques for experimentalfluid mechanics. Annual Review of Fluid Mechanics23: 261–304.

Ahlers G (2001) Effect of sidewall conductance on heat-transport measurements for turbulent Rayleigh–Benardconvection. Physical Review E 62: 015303.

Ahlers G (2005) Experiments with Rayleigh–Benard convection.In: Mutabazi I, Jose EW, and Guyon E (eds.) Springer Tractsin Modern Physics: Dynamics of Spatio-Temporal CellularStructures – Henri Benard Centenary Review, pp. 67–94.New York: Springer.

Albers M and Christensen UR (2001) Channeling of plume flowbeneath mid-ocean ridges. Earth and Planetary ScienceLetters 187: 207–220.

Allegre CJ (1987) Isotope geodynamics. Earth and PlanetaryScience Letters 86: 175–203.

Aref H (1984) Stirring by chaotic advection. Journal of FluidMechanics 143: 1–15.

Asaeda T and Watanabe K (1989) The mechanism of heattransport in thermal convection at high Rayleigh numbers.Physics of Fluids A 1: 861–867.

Asseban A, Lallemand M, Saulnier J-B, et al. (2000) Digitalspeckle photography and speckle tomography in heattransfer studies. Optics and Laser Technology 32: 583–592.

Assenheimer M and Steinberg V (1993) Rayleigh–Benradconvection near the gas–liquid critical point. Physical ReviewLetters 70: 3888–3891.

Assenheimer M and Steinberg V (1996) Observation ofcoexisting upflow and downflow hexagons in BoussinesqRayleigh–Benard convection. Physical Review Letters76: 756–759.

Baker DJ (1966) A technique for the precise measurement ofsmall fluid velocities. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 26: 573–575.

Batchelor GK (1954) Heat convection and buoyancy effects influids. Quarterly Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society80: 339–358.

Becker T, Faccenna C, Giardini D, and O’Connell R (1999) Thedevelopment of slabs in the upper mantle: Insights fromnumerical and laboratory experiments. Journal ofGeophysical Research 104: 15207–15226.

Bellahsen N, Faccenna C, and Funiciello F (2005) Dynamics ofsubduction and plate motion in laboratory experiments:Insights into the ‘plate tectonics’ behavior of the Earth.Journal of Geophysical Research 110: B01401 (doi:10.1029/2004JB002999).

Benard H (1900) Les tourbillons cellulaires dans une nappeliquide. Revue Generale des Science Pures et Appliquees11: 1261–1271; 1309–1328.

Benard H (1901) Les tourbillons cellulaires dans une nappeliquide transportant la chaleur par convection en regimepermanent. Annales de Chimie et de Physique 23: 62–144.

Bercovici D (2003) The generation of plate tectonics frommantle convection. Earth and Planetary Science Letters205: 107–121.

Bercovici D and Mahoney J (1994) Double flood basalts andplume head separation at the 660-kilometer discontinuity.Science 266: 1367–1369.

Bercovici D and Kelly A (1997) Nonlinear initiation of diapirs andplume heads. Physics of the Earth and Planetary Interiors101: 119–130.

Bercovici D, Ricard Y, and Richards MA (2000) The relationbetween mantle dynamics and plate tectonics: A primer.In: Richards MA, Gordon R, and Van der Hilst R (eds.) AGU

Geophysical Monograph 21: The History and Dynamics ofGlobal Plate Motions, pp. 5–46. Washington DC: AGU.

Bercovici D, Ricard Y, and Schubert G (2001) A two-phasemodel for compaction and damage, 1. General theory.Journal of Geophysical Research 106: 8887–8906.

Bercovici D, Ricard Y, and Schubert G (2001) A two-phasemodel for compaction and damage, 3. Applications to shearlocalization and plate boundary formation. Journal ofGeophysical Research 106: 8925–8940.

Biot MA and Ode H (1965) Theory of gravity instability with variableoverburden and compaction. Geophysics 30: 213–227.

Bodenschatz E, Gemelke N, Carr J, and Ragnarsson R (1997)Rifts in spreading wax layers: An analogy to the mid-oceanrift formation. Localization Phenomena and Dynamics ofBrittle and Granular Systems. Columbia University.

Bodenschatz E, Pesch W, and Ahlers G (2000) Recentdevelopments in Rayleigh–Benard convection. AnnualReview of Fluid Mechanics 32: 709–773.

Bonatti E (1985) Punctiform initiation of seafloor spreading inthe Red Sea during transition from a continental to anoceanic rift. Nature 316: 33–37.

Booker JR (1976) Thermal convection with strongly temperaturedependent viscosity. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 76: 741–754.

Booker JR and Stengel KC (1978) Futher thoughts onconvective heat transport in a variable viscosity fluid. Journalof Fluid Mechanics 86: 289–291.

Boss AP and Sacks IS (1986) High spatial resolution models oftime-dependent, layered mantle convection. GeophysicalJournal of the Royal Astronomical Society 87: 241–264.

Boxman RL and Shlien DJ (1978) Interferometric measurementtechnique for the temperature field of axisymmetric buoyantphenomena. Applied Optics 17: 2788–2793.

Boxman RL and Shlien DJ (1981) Laminar starting plumetemperature field measurement. Journal of Heat and MassTransfer 24: 919–931.

Brown E, Nikilaenko A, Funfschilling D, and Ahlers G (2005) Heattransport in turbulent Rayleigh–Benard convection: Effect offinite top- and bottom-plate conductivities. Physics of Fluids17: 075108.

Buck WR (1987) Analysis of the cooling of a variable viscosityfluid with applications to the Earth. Geophysical Journal ofthe Royal Astronomical Society 89: 549–577.

Busse FH (1967a) On the stability of two-dimensionalconvection in a layer heated from below. Journal of AppliedMathematics and Physics 46: 140–149.

Busse FH (1967b) The stability of finite amplitude cellularconvection and its relation to an extremum principle. Journalof Fluid Mechanics 30: 625–635.

Busse FH (1978) Non linear properties of thermal convection.Reports on Progress in Physics 41: 1929–1967.

Busse FH (1981) On the aspect ratios of two-layer mantleconvection. Physics of the Earth and Planetary Interiors24: 320–324.

Busse FH (1989) Fundamentals of thermal convection.In: Perltier WR (ed.), Mantle Convection: Plate tectonics andGlobal Dynamics, pp. 23–95. Montreux: Gordon and Breach.

Busse FH and Whitehead JA (1971) Instabilities of convectionrolls in high Prandtl number fluid. Journal of Fluid Mechanics47: 305–320.

Busse FH, Christensen U, Clever R, et al. (1994) 3D convectionat infinite Prandtl number in cartesian geometry – Abenchmark comparison. Geophysical and AstrophysicalFluid Dynamics 75: 39–59.

Buttles J and Olson P (1998) A laboratory model of subductionzone anisotropy. Earth and Planetary Science Letters164: 245–262.

Campbell IH and Griffiths RW (1990) Implications of mantleplume structure for the evolution of flood basalts. Earth andPlanetary Science Letters 99: 79–93.

156 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 69: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Canright D and Morris S (1993) Buoyant instability of a viscousfilm over a passive fluid. Journal of Fluid Mechanics255: 349–372.

Cardin P and Nataf H-C (1991) Nonlinear dynamical couplingoberserved near the threshold of convection in a two-layersystem. Europhysics Letters 14: 655–660.

Carrigan CR (1982) Multiple scale convection in theEarth’s mantle: A three dimensional study. Science215: 965–967.

Castaing B, Gunaratne G, Heslot F, et al. (1989) Scaling of hardturbulence in Rayleigh–Benard convection. Journal of FluidMechanics 204: 1–30.

Cazenave A, Monnerau M, and Gibert D (1987) Seasat gravityundulations in the central indian ocean. Physics of the Earthand Planetary Interiors 48: 130–141.

Chandrasekhar S (1977) Liquid Crystals, 342 p. Cambridge:Cambridge University Press.

Chandrasekhar S (1961) Hydrodynamic and HydromagneticStability. New York: Dover.

Chavanne X, Chilla F, Chabaud F, Castaing B, and Hebral B(2001) Turbulent Rayleigh–Benard convection in gaseousand liquid He. Physics of Fluids 13: 1300–1320.

Chay A and Shlien DJ (1986) Scalar field measurements of alaminar starting plume cap using digital processing ofinterferograms. Physics of Fluids 29: 2358–2366.

Chen F and Chen CF (1989) Experimental investigation ofconvective stability in a superposed fluid and porous layerwhen heated from below. Journal of Fluid Mechanics207: 311–321.

Chen MM and Whitehead JA (1968) Evolution oftwo-dimensional periodic Rayleigh convection cells ofarbitrary wave-numbers. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 31: 1–15.

Chilla F, Rastello M, Chaumat S, and Castaing B (2004) Longrelaxation times and tilit sensitivity in Rayleigh–Benardturbulence. European Physical Journal B 40: 223–227.

Choblet G and Sotin C (2000) 3D thermal convection withvariable viscosity: Can transient cooling be described by aquasi-static scaling law? Physics of the Earth and PlanetaryInteriors 119: 321–336.

Christensen U (1984) Instability in a hot boundary layer andinitiation of thermochemical plumes. Annales deGeophysique 2: 311–320.

Christensen U (1985) Heat transport by variable viscosityconvection II: Pressure influence, non-Newtonian rheologyand decaying heat sources. Physics of the Earth andPlanetary Interiors 37: 183–205.

Christensen U and Yuen DA (1984) The interaction of asubducting slab with a chemical or phase boundary. Journalof Geophysical Research 89: 4389–4402.

Christensen UR and Harder H (1991) 3-D Convection withvariable viscosity. Geophysical Journal International104: 213–226.

Christensen UR and Hofmann AW (1994) Segregation ofsubducted oceanic crust in the convecting mantle. Journal ofGeophysical Research 99: 19867–19884.

Ciofalo M, Signorino M, and Simiano M (2003) Tomographicparticle-image velocimetry and thermography in Rayleigh–Benard convection using suspended thermochromic liquidcrystals and digital image processing. Experiments in Fluids34: 156–172.

Cottrell E, Jaupart C, and Molnar P (2004) Marginal stability ofthick continental lithosphere. Geophysical Research Letters31 (doi: 10.1029/2004GL020332).

Coulliette DL and Loper DE (1995) Experimental, numerical andanalytical models of mantle starting plumes. Physics of theEarth and Planetary Interiors 92: 143–167.

Crane K (1985) The spacing of rift axis highs: dependence upondiapiric processes in the underlying asthenosphere? Earthand Planetary Science Letters 72: 405–414.

Cruickshank JO and Munson BR (1981) Viscous fluid bucklingof plane and axisymmetric jets. Journal of Fluid Mechanics113: 221–239.

Cserepes L and Rabinowicz M (1985) Gravity and convection ina two-layered mantle. Earth and Planetary Science Letters76: 193–207.

Cserepes L, Rabinowicz M, and Rosemberg-Borot C (1988)Three-dimensional infinite Prandtl number convection in oneand two layers with implications for the Earth’s gravity field.Journal of Geophysical Research 93: 12009–12025.

Dabiri D and Gharib M (1991) Digital particle imagethermometry: The method and implementation. Experimentsin Fluids 11: 77–86.

Dabiri D and Gharib M (1996) The effects of forced boundaryconditions on flow within a cubic cavity using digital particleimage thermometry and velocimetry (DPITV). ExperimentalThermal and Fluid Science 13: 349–363.

Dalziel SB, Hughes GO, and Sutherland BR (2000) Whole fielddensity measurements by ‘synthetic schlieren’. Experimentsin Fluids 28: 322–345.

Davaille A and Jaupart C (1993) Transient high-Rayleigh numberthermal convection with large viscosity variations. Journal ofFluid Mechanics 253: 141–166.

Davaille A and Jaupart C (1994) Onset of thermal convection influids with temperature-dependent viscosity: Application tothe oceanic mantle. Journal of Geophysical Research99: 19853–19866.

Davaille A (1999a) Two-layer thermal convection in viscousfluids. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 379: 223–253.

Davaille A (1999b) Simultaneous generation of hotspots andsuperswells by convection in a heterogeneous planetarymantle. Nature 402: 756–760.

Davaille A, Girard F, and Le Bars M (2002) How to anchorplumes in a convecting mantle? Earth and Planetary ScienceLetters 203: 62–634.

Davaille A, Le Bars M, and Carbonne C (2003) Thermalconvection in a heterogeneous mantle. Comptes Rendus DeL Academie Des Sciences Geosciences 335(1): 141–156.

Davaille A and Vatteville J (2005) On the transient nature ofmantle plumes. Geophysical Research Letters 32(doi:10.1029/2005GL023029).

Davaille A, Limare A, Vidal V, et al. (2006) Imaging isotherms inviscous fluids. Experiments in Fluids (submitted).

Davies GF (1988) Ocean bathymetry and mantle convection, 1.Large-scale flow and hotspots. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 93: 10467–10480.

Davy P and Cobbold PR (1991) Experiments on shortening of a4-layer continental lithosphere. Tectonophysics 188: 1–25.

Deardorff JW, Willis GE, and Lilly DK (1969) Laboratoryinvestigation of non-steady penetrative convection. Journalof Fluid Mechanics 35: 7–31.

de Gennes P and Prost J (1993) The Physics of Liquid Crystals,2nd edn., 597 pp. Oxford: Clarendon Press.

Dubuffet F, Rabinowicz M, and Monnereau M (2000) Multiplescales in mantle convection. Earth and Planetary ScienceLetters 178: 351–366.

Dumoulin C, Doin M-P, and Fleitout L (2001) Numericalsimulations of the cooling of an oceanic lithosphere above aconvecting mantle. Physics of the Earth and PlanetaryInteriors 125: 45–64.

Eberle MA and Forsyth DW (1995) Regional viscosity variations,small-scale convection and slope of the depth-age1/2 curve.Geophysical Research Letters 22: 473–476.

Ekstrom G and Dziewonski AM (1998) The unique anisotropy ofthe pacific upper mantle. Nature 394: 168–172.

Elder JW (1967) Convective self-propulsion of continents.Nature 214: 657–660.

Elder JW (1968) The unstable thermal interface. Journal of FluidMechanics 32: 69–96.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 157

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 70: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Faccenna C, Davy P, Brun J-P, et al. (1996) The dynamics ofback-arc extension: An experimental approach to theopening of the Tyrrhenian Sea. Geophysical JournalInternational 126: 781–795.

Faccenna C, Giardini D, Davy P, and Argentieri A (1999)Initiation of subduction at Atlantic-type margins: Insightsfrom laboratory experiments. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 104: 2749–2766.

Faccenna C, Piromallo C, Crespo-Blanc A, Jolivet L, andRossetti F (2004) Lateral slab deformation and the origin ofthe western Mediterranean arcs. Tectonics 23: TC1012(doi:10.1029/2002TC001488).

Farnetani CG (1997) Excess temperature of mantle plumes: Therole of chemical stratification across D0. GeophysicalResearch Letters 24: 1583–1586.

Fedotov SA (1975) Mechanism of magma ascent and deepfeeding channels of island arc volcanoes. Bulletin ofVolcanology 39: 241–254.

Feighner MA and Richards MA (1995) The fluid dynamics ofplume-ridge and plumeplate interactions: An experimentalinvestigation. Earth and Planetary Science Letters129: 171–182.

Feighner MA, Kellogg LH, and Travis BJ (1995) Numericalmodeling of chemically buoyant plumes at spreading ridges.Geophysical Research Letters 22: 715–718.

Fleitout L and Yuen DA (1984) Steady-state, secondaryconvection beneath lithospheric plates with temperature andpressure-dependent viscosity. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 89: 9227–9244.

Fletcher RC (1972) Application of mathematical model toemplacement of mantle gneiss domes. American Journal ofScience 272: 197–216.

Fountain GO, Khakhar DV, and Ottino JM (1998) Visualization ofthree-dimensional chaos. Nature 281: 683–686.

Fountain GO, Khakhar DV, Mezic I, and Ottino JM (2000)Chaotic mixing in a bounded three-dimensional flow. Journalof Fluid Mechanics 417: 265–301.

Fuji T (1963) Theory of the steady laminar naturalconvection above a horizontal line heat source and a pointheat source. International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer6: 597–606.

Fujisawa N and Adrian R (1999) Three-dimensional temperaturemeasurement in turbulent thermal convection by extendedrange scanning liquid crystal thermometry. Journal ofVisualization 1: 355–364.

Fujisawa N and Funatani S (2000) Simultaneous measurementof temperature and velocity in a turbulent thermal convectionby the extended range liquid crystal visualization technique.Experiments in Fluids 29: 158–165.

Fujisawa N and Hashizume Y (2001) An uncertainty analysis oftemperature and velocity measured by a liquid crystalvisualization technique. Measurement Science andTechnology 12: 1235–1242.

Funiciello F, Morra G, Giardini D, and Regenauer-Lieb K (2003a)Dynamics of retreating slabs. Part 1: Insights from 2-Dnumerical experiments. Journal of Geophysical Research108: 2206 (doi: 10.1029/2001JB000898).

Funiciello F, Faccenna C, Giardini D, and Regenauer-Lieb K(2003b) Dynamics of retreating slabs: Part 2. Insights fromthree-dimensional laboratory experiments. Journal ofGeophysical Research 108: 2207 (doi:10.1029/2001JB000896).

Funiciello F, Faccenna C, and Giardini D (2004) Role of lateralmantle flow in the evolution of subduction system: Insightsfrom 3-D laboratory experiments. Geophysical JournalInternational 157: 1393–1406.

Funiciello F, Moroni M, Piromallo C, Faccenna C, Cenedese A,and Bui HA (2006) Mapping mantle flow during retreatingsubduction: Laboratory models analyzed by feature

tracking. Journal of Geophysical Research 111: B03402(doi:10.1029/2005JB003792).

Funfschilling D, Brown E, Nikolaenko A, and Ahlers G (2005)Heat transport by turbulent Rayleigh-Benard Convection incylindrical cells with aspect ratio one and larger. Journal ofFluid Mechanics 536: 145–155.

Gebhart B, Pera LW, and Schorr A (1970) Steady laminar naturalconvection plumes above a horizontal line heat source.International Journal of Heat and Mass Transfer 13: 161–171.

Geitling AV (1998) Rayleigh-Benard Convection. Singapore:World Scientific.

Giannandrea E and Christensen U (1993) Variable viscosityconvection experiments with a stress-free upper boundaryand implications for the heat transport in the Earth’s mantle.Physics of the Earth and Planetary Interiors 78: 139–152.

Globe S and Dropkin D (1959) Natural-convection heat transfertin liquids confined by two horinzontal plates and heated frombelow. Journal of Heat Transfer 31: 24–28.

Gluckman B, Willaime H, and Gollub J (1993) Geometry ofisothermal and isoconcentration surfaces in thermalturbulence. Physics of Fluids A 5: 647–651.

Goldstein RJ, Chiang HD, and See DL (1990) High Rayleigh-number convection in a horizontal enclosure. Journal of FluidMechanics 213: 111–126.

Gonnermann HM, Manga M, and Jellinek AM (2002) Dynamicsand longevity of an initially stratified mantle. GeophysicalResearch Letters 29 (doi:10. 1029/2002GL01485).

Gonnermann HM, Jellinek AM, Richards MA, and Manga M(2004) Modulation of mantle plumes and heat flow at the coremantle boundary by plate-scale flow: Results fromlaboratory experiments. Earth and Planetary Science Letters226: 53–67.

Grasset O and Parmentier EM (1998) Thermal convection in avolumetrically, infinite Prandtl number fluid with stronglytemperature-dependent viscosity: Implications for planetaryevolution. Journal of Geophysical Research103: 18171–18181.

Griffiths RW (1986) Thermals in extremely viscous fluids,including the effects of temperature-dependent viscosity.Journal of Fluid Mechanics 166: 115–138.

Griffiths RW and Turner JS (1988) Folding of viscous plumesimpinging on a density or viscosity interface. GeophysicalJournal 95: 397–419.

Griffiths RW and Richards MA (1989) The adjustment of mantleplumes to changes in plate motion. Geophysical ResearchLetters 16: 437–440.

Griffths RW, Gurnis M, and Eitelberg G (1989) Holographicmeasurements of surface topography in laboratory modelsof mantle hotspots. Geophysical Journal 96: 1–19.

Griffiths RW and Campbell IH (1990) Stirring and structure inmantle starting plumes. Earth and Planetary Science Letters99: 66–78.

Griffiths RW and Campbell IH (1991) Interaction of mante plumeheads with the Earth’s surface and the onset of small-scaleconvection. Journal of Geophysical Research96: 18295–18310.

Griffiths RW, Hackney RI, and van der Hilst RD (1995) Alaboratory investigation of effects of trench migration on thedescent of subducted slabs. Earth and Planetary ScienceLetters 133(1–2): 1–17.

Grigne C, Labrosse S, and Tackley PJ (2005) Convective heattransfer as a function of wavelength: Implications for thecooling of the Earth. Journal of Geophysical Research110: B03409 (doi:10.1029/2004JB003376).

Grossmann S and Lohse D (2000) Scaling in thermal convection:A unifying theory. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 407: 27–56.

Guillou L and Jaupart C (1995) On the effect of continents onmantle convection. Journal of Geophysical Research100: 24217–24238.

158 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 71: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Guillou-Frottier L, Buttles J, and Olson P (1995) Laboratoryexperiments on structure of subducted lithosphere. Earthand Planetary Science Letters 133: 19–34.

Gurnis M (1988) Large-scale mantle convection and theaggregation and dispersal of supercontinents. Nature335: 695–699.

Gurnis M and Davies GF (1986) The e_ect of depth-dependentviscosity on convective mixing in the mantle and the possiblesurvival of primitive mantle. Geophysical Research Letters13: 541–544.

Gurnis M, Zhong S, and Toth J (2000) On the competing roles offault reactivation and brittle failure in generating platetectonics from mantle convection. In: Richards MA,Gordon R, and Van der Hilst R (eds.) AGU GeophysicalMonograph 21: The History and Dynamics of Global PlateMotions, pp. 73–94. Washington DC: AGU.

Haller G (2001) Finding finite-time invariant manifolds in two-dimensional velocity fields. Chaos 10: 99–108.

Haller G and Yuan G (2000) Lagrangian coherent structures andmixing in two-dimensional turbulence. Physica D147: 352–370.

Hanenkamp A and Merzkirch W (2005) Investigation of theproperties of a sharp-focusing schlieren system by means ofFourier analysis. Optics and Lasers in Engineering 44: 159–169.

Hansen U and Yuen DA (1988) Numerical simulations of thermo-chemical instabilities at the core-mantle boundary. Nature33: 237–240.

Hansen U and Yuen DA (2000) Extended-Boussinesq thermal–chemical convection with moving heat sources and variableviscosity. Earth and Planetary Science Letters 176: 401–411.

Haramina T and Tilgner A (2004) Coherent structures inboundary layers of Rayleigh–Benard convection. PhysicalReview E 69: 056306.

Hauf W and Grigull U (1970) Optical methods in heat transfer.In: Hartnett JP and Irvine TF Jr. (eds.) Advances in HeatTransfer, pp. 133–366. New York: Academic Press.

Haxby WF and Weissel JK (1986) Evidence for small-scaleconvection from seasat altimeter data. Journal ofGeophysical Research 91: 3507–3520.

Heflinger LO, Wuerker RF, and Brooks RE (1966) Holographicinterferometry. Journal of Applied Physics 37: 642–649.

Herrick DL and Parmentier EM (1994) Episodic large-scaleoverturn of two-layer mantles in terrestrial planets. Journal ofGeophysical Research 99: 2053–2062.

Heslot F, Castaing B, and Libchaber A (1987) Transitions toturbulence in helium gas. Physical Review A 36: 5870–5873.

Heutmaker MS and Gollub JP (1987) Wave-vector field ofconvective flow patterns. Physical Review A 35: 242–260.

Hofmann AW and Hart SR (1978) An assessment of local andregional isotopic equilibrium in the mantle. Earth andPlanetary Science Letters 38: 44–62.

Holmes A (1931) Radioactivity and Earth movements.Transactions of the Geological Society of Glasgow18: 559–606.

Horsmann M and Merzkirch W (1981) Scattered light streamingbirefringence in colloidal solutions. Rheologica Acta20: 501–510.

Houseman GA (1990) The thermal structure of mantle plumes:Axisymmetric or triple-junction? Geophysical JournalInternational 102: 25–43.

Houseman GA and Molnar P (1997) Gravitational (Rayleigh–Taylor) instability of a layer with non-linear viscosity andconvective thinning of continental lithosphere. GeophysicalJournal International 128: 125–150.

Houseman GA and Gubbins D (1997) Deformation of subductedoceanic lithosphere. Geophysical Journal International131: 535–551.

Howard LN (1964) Convection at high Rayleigh number.In: Gortler H (ed.), Proceedings of the 11th International

Congress Applied Mechanics, pp. 1109–1115. Berlin:Springer.

Huang J, Zhong S, and van Hunen J (2003) Controls onsublithospheric small-scale convection. Journal ofGeophysical Research 108(B8): 2405 (doi:10.1029/2003JB002456).

Ito G (2001) Reykjanes ‘V’-shaped ridges originating from apulsing and dehydrating mantle plume. Nature411: 681–684.

Jacoby WR (1970) Instability in the upper mantle and globalplate movements. Journal of Geophysical Research75: 5671–5680.

Jacoby WR (1973) Model experiment of plate movements.Nature (Physical Sciences) 242: 130–134.

Jacoby WR (1976) Paraffin model experiment of plate tectonics.Tectonophysics 35: 103–113.

Jacoby WR and Schmeling H (1982) On the effects of thelithosphere on mantle convection and evolution. Physics ofthe Earth and Planetary Interiors 29: 305–319.

Jackson MPA and Talbot CJ (1989) Anatomy of mushroomshaped diapirs. Journal of Structural Geology 11: 211–230.

Jaupart C, Brandeis G, and Allegre CJ (1984) Stagnant layers atthe bottom of convecting magma chambers. Nature308: 535–538.

Jaupart C and Brandeis G (1986) The stagnant bottom layer ofconvecting magma chambers. Earth and Planetary ScienceLetters 80: 183–199.

Jaupart C and Parsons B (1985) Convective instabilities in avariable viscosity fluid cooled from above. Physics of theEarth and Planetary Interiors 39: 41–32.

Jaupart C, Mareschal J-C, Guillou-Frottier L, and Davaille A(1998) Heat flow and thickness of the lithosphere in thecanadian shield. Journal of Geophysical Research103: 15269–15286.

Jaupart C, Molnar P, and Cottrell E (2007) Instability of achemically dense layer heated from below and overlain by adeep less viscous fluid. Journal of Fluid Mechanics572: 433–469.

Javoy M (1999) Chemical Earth models. Comptes Rendus De LAcademie Des Sciences 329: 537–555.

Jellinek AM, Kerr RC, and Griffiths RW (1999) Mixing andcompositional stratification produced by natural convection.1. Experiments and their application to Earth’s core andmantle. Journal of Geophysical Research 104: 7183–7201.

Jellinek AM and Manga M (2002) The influence of a chemicalboundary layer on the fixity, spacing and lifetime of mantleplumes. Nature 41: 760–763.

Jellinek AM, Lenardic A, and Manga M (2002) The influence ofinterior mantle temperature on the structure of plumes:Heads for Venus, Tails for the Earth. Geophysical ResearchLetters 29 (doi:10.1029/2001GL014624).

Jellinek AM, Gonnermann HM, and Richards MA (2003) Plumecapture by divergent plate motions: Implications for thedistribution of hotspots, geochemistry of midocean ridgebasalts, and heat flux at the core–mantle boundary. Earthand Planetary Science Letters 205: 367–378.

Jellinek AM and Manga M (2004) Links between long-livedhotspots, mantle plumes, D0, and plate tectonics. Reviews ofGeophysics 42 (doi:10.1029/2003RG000144).

Jurine D, Jaupart C, Brandeis G, and Tackley PJ (2005)Penetration of mantle plumes through depleted lithosphere.Journal of Geophysical Research 110 (doi:10.1029/2005JB003751).

Kaminski E and Jaupart C (2003) Laminar starting pluimes inhigh-Prandtl-number fluids. Journal of Fluid Mechanics478: 287–298.

Katz RF, Ragnarsson R, and Bodenschatz E (2005) TectonicMicroplates in a Wax Model of Sea Floor Spreading. NewJournal of Physics 7 (doi:10.1088/1367-2630/7/1/037).

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 159

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 72: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Katsaros KB, Liu WT, Businger JA, and Tillman JE (1977) Heatthermal structure in the interfacial boundary layer measuredin an open tank of water in turbulent free convection. Journalof Fluid Mechanics 83: 311–335.

Kellogg LH, Hager BH, and van der Hilst RD (1999)Compositional stratification in the deep mantle. Science283: 1881–1884.

Kelly A and Bercovici D (1997) The clustering of rising diapirsand plume heads. Geophysical Research Letters24: 201–204.

Kenyon PM and Turcotte DL (1983) Convection in a two-layer mantle with a strongly temperature-dependentviscosity. Journal of Geophysical Research 88: 6403–6414.

Kerr RC and Lister JR (1987) The spread of subductedlithoshperic material along the mid-mantle boundary. Earthand Planetary Science Letters 85: 241–247.

Kerr RC and Lister JR (1988) Island arc and mid-ocean ridgevolcanism, modelled by diapirism from linear source regions.Earth and Planetary Science Letters 88: 143–152.

Kerr RC and Meriaux C (2004) Structure and dynamics ofsheared mantle plumes. Geochemistry, Geophysics,Geosystems 5 (doi:10.1029/2004GC000749).

Kimura I, Hyodo T, and Ozawa M (1998) Temperature and velocitymeasurement of 3D thermal flow using thermosensitive liquidcrystals. Journal of Visualization 1: 145–152.

Kincaid C and Olson P (1987) An experimental study ofsubduction and slab migration. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 92: 13832–13840.

Kincaid C, Ito G, and Gable C (1995) Laboratory investigation ofthe interaction of off-axis mantle plumes and spreadingcentres. Nature 376: 758–761.

Kincaid C, Sparks D, and Detrick R (1996) The relativeimportance of plate-driven and buoyancy- driven flow atmid-ocean ridge spreading centers. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 101: 16177–16193.

Kincaid C and Griffiths RW (2003) Laboratory models of thethermal evolution of the mantle during rollback subduction.Nature 425: 58–62.

Kincaid C and Griffiths RW (2004) Variability in flow andtemperatures within mantle subduction zones.Geochemistry, Geophysics, Geosystems 5: Q06002(doi:10.1029/2003GC000666).

Korenaga J and Jordan TH (2003) Physics of multiscaleconvection in Earth’s mantle: Onset of the sublithosphericconvection. Journal of Geophysical Research 108(doi:10.1029/2002JB001760).

Kraichman RH (1962) Turbulent thermal convection at arbitraryPrandtl number. Physics of Fluids 5: 1374–1389.

Krishnamurti R (1968a) Finite amplitude convection withchanging mean temperature. Part 1. Theory. Journal of FluidMechanics 33: 445–455.

Krishnamurti R (1968b) Finite amplitude convectionwith changing mean temperature. Part 2. Anexperimental test of the theory. Journal of Fluid Mechanics33: 457–463.

Krishnamurti R (1970a) On the transition to turbulentconvection. Part 1. Transition from two to three dimensionalflow. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 42: 295–307.

Krishnamurti R (1970b) On the transition to turbulentconvection. Part 2. Transition to time-dependent flow.Journal of Fluid Mechanics 42: 309–320.

Krishnamurthi R (1979) Theory and experiment in cellularconvection. Proceedings of NATO Advanced StudyInstitute on Continental Drift and the Mechanism of PlateTectonics, pp. 245–257. England: University of Newcastleupon Tyne.

Krishnamurti R and Howard LN (1981) Large scale flowgeneration in turbulent convection. Proceedings of theNational Academy of Sciences 78: 1981–1985.

Kulacki FA and Goldstein RJ (1972) Thermal convection in ahorizontal fluid layer with volumetric heat sources. Journal ofFluid Mechanics 55: 271.

Kulacki FA and Nagle ME (1975) Natural convection in ahorizontal fluid layer with volumetric heat sources. Journal ofHeat Transfer 91: 204–211.

Kumagai I (2002) On the anatomy of mantle plumes: Effect ofthe viscosity ratio on entrainment and stirring. Earth andPlanetary Science Letters 198: 211–224.

Kumagai I and Kurita K (2000) On the fate of mantle plumes atdensity interfaces. Earth and Planetary Science Letters179: 63–71.

Kumagai I, Davaille A, and Kurita K (2007) On the fate of mantlethermal plumes at density interface. Earth and PlanetaryScience Letters 254: 180–193.

Laudenbach N (2001) Experimentelle und numerischeUntersuchungen zur Ausbreitung von Volumenstorungen inthermishen Plumes. PhD Dissertation, Gottingen.

Laudenbach N and Christensen UR (2001) An optical methodfor measuring temperature in laboratory models of mantleplumes. Geophysical Journal International 145: 528–534.

Le Bars M and Davaille A (2002) Stability of thermal convectionin two superimposed miscible viscous fluids. Journal of FluidMechanics 471: 339–363.

Le Bars M and Davaille A (2004a) Large interface deformation intwo-layer thermal convection of miscible viscous fluids.Journal of Fluid Mechanics 499: 75–110.

Le Bars M and Davaille A (2004b) Whole-layer convection in anheterogeneous planetary mantle. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 109 (doi:10.1029/2003JB002617).

Lenardic A, Moresi L-N, Jellinek AM, and Manga M (2005)Continental insulation, mantle cooling, and the surface areaof oceans and continents. Earth and Planetary ScienceLetters 234: 317–333.

Lewis WT, Incropera FP, and Viskanta R (1982) Interferometricstudy of stable salinity gradients heated from below orcooled from above. Journal of Fluid Mechanics116: 411–430.

Lister JR (1989) Selective withdrawal from a viscous two-layersystem. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 198: 231–254.

Lister JR and Kerr RC (1989) The effect of geometry on thegravitational instability of a buoyant region of viscous fluid.Journal of Fluid Mechanics 202: 231–254.

Lister JR and Kerr RC (1989) The propagation of two-dimensional and axisymmetric viscous gravity currentsalong a fluid interface. Journal of Fluid Mechanics203: 215249.

Lithgow-Bertelloni C, Richards MA, Conrad CP, andGriffiths RW (2001) Plume generation in natural thermalconvection at high Rayleigh and Prandtl numbers. Journal ofFluid Mechanics 434: 1–21.

Lohmann AW and Silva DE (1972) A Talbot interferometer withcircular gratings. Optics Communications 4: 326–328.

Loper DE and Stacey FD (1983) The dynamical and thermalstructure of deep mantle plumes. Physics of the Earth andPlanetary Interiors 33: 305–317.

Loper DE and Eltayeb IA (1986) On the stability of the D0 layer.Geophysical and Astrophysical Fluid Dynamics 36: 229–255.

Loper DE and McCartney K (1986) Mantle plumes and theperiodicity of magnetic field reversals. GeophysicalResearch Letters 13: 1525–1528.

Loper DE, McCartney K, and Buzyna G (1988) A model ofcorrelated episodicity in magnetic-field reversals, climateand mass extinctions. Journal of Geology 88: 1–14.

Mach E (1873) Optish-akustusche. Prague: Calve.McNamara AK and Zhong S (2004) Thermochemical

structures within a spherical mantle: Superplumes orpiles?. Journal of Geophysical Research 109 (doi:10.1029/2003JB002847).

160 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 73: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

McNamara AK and Zhong S (2005) Thermochemical structuresbeneath Africa and the Pacific Ocean. Nature437: 1136–1139.

Malkus WVR (1954) Discrete transitions in turbulentconvection. Proceedings of the Royal Society of London A225: 185–195.

Manga M (1997) Interactions between mantle diapirs.Geophysical Research Letters 24: 1871–1874.

Manga M, Stone HA, and O’Connell RJ (1993) The interaction ofplume heads with compositional discontinuities in theEarth’s mantle. Journal of Geophysical Research98: 19979–19990.

Manga M and Weeraratne D (1999) Experimental study of non-Boussinesq Rayleigh–Benard convection at high Rayleighand Prandtl numbers. Physics of Fluids 10: 2969–2976.

Manga M, Weeraratne D, and Morris SJS (2001) Boundary-layerthickness and instabilities in Benard convection of a liquidwith a temperature-dependent viscosity. Physics of Fluids13: 802–805.

Manga M and Sinton A (2004) Formation of bands, ridges andgrooves on Europa by cyclic deformation: Insights fromanalogue wax experiments. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 109: E09001 (10.1029/2004JE002249).

Marsh BD (1979) Island arc development: Some observationsand speculations. Journal of Geology 87: 687–713.

Marsh BD and Carmichael ISE (1974) Benioff zone magmatism.Journal of Geophysical Research 79: 1196–1206.

Martinod J and Davy P (1994) Periodic instabilities duringcompression of the lithosphere 2. Analogue experiments.Journal of Geophysical Research 99: 12057–12070.

Matsumoto N, Namiki A, and Sumita I (2006) Influence of a basalthermal anomaly on mantle convection. Physics of the Earthand Planetary Interiors 157: 208–222.

Maxwell JC (1873) Double refraction of viscous fluids in motion.Proceedings of the Royal Society of London Series A 22: 46–47.

Merzkirch W (1987) Flow Visualization 2nd edn. Orlando, FL:Academic Press.

Merzkirch W (1989) Streaming birefringence. In: Yang W-J (ed.),Handbook of Flow Visualization pp. 177–180. Taylor andFrancis.

Merzkirch W (1993) Interferometric methods. Lecture Series –van Kareman Institute for Fluid Dynamics 9: 1–96.

Merzkirch W (1995) Density-sensitive whole-field flowmeasurement by optical speckle photography. ExperimentalThermal and Fluid Science 10: 435–443.

Merzkirch W, Vitkin D, and Xiong W (1998) Quantitative flowvisualization. Meccanica 33: 503–516.

Merzkirch W (2000) Non-intrusive measurement techniques.Lecture series, Van Karman Institute for Fluid Dynamics6: 1–37.

Morgan WJ (1971) Convection plumes in the lower mantle.Nature 230: 42–43.

Mohr PA and Wood CA (1976) Volcano spacing and lithosphericattenuation in the eastern rift of Africa. Earth and PlanetaryScience Letters 33: 126–144.

Montagner J-P and Tanimoto T (1990) Global anisotropy in theUpper Mantleinferred from the regionalization of phasevelocities. Journal of Geophysical Research 95: 4797–4819.

Montague LN and Kellogg LH (2000) Numerical models of adense layer at the base of the mantle and implications for thegeodynamics of D0. Journal of Geophysical Research105(2000): 11101–11114.

Moore WB, Schubert G, and Tackley P (1998) Three-dimensional simulations of plume-lithosphere interaction atthe Hawaiian swell. Science 279: 1008–1011.

Moresi L and Solomatov V (1998) Mantle ocnvection with abrittle lithosphere: thoughts on the global tectonic styles ofthe Earth and Venus. Geophysical Journal International133: 669–682.

Morris S (1982) The effects of a strongly temperature-dependent viscosity on slow flow past a hot sphere. Journalof Fluid Mechanics 124: 1–25.

Morris S and Canright DR (1984) A boundary-layer analysis ofBenard convection with strongly temperature-dependentviscosity. Physics of the Earth and Planetary Interiors36: 355–373.

Morris SW, Bodenschatz E, Cannell DS, and Ahlers G (1993)Spiral defect chaos in large aspect ratio Rayleigh–Benardconvection. Physical Review Letters 71: 2026.

Moses E, Zocchi G, and Libchaber A (1993) An experimentalstudy of laminar plumes. Journal of Fluid Mechanics251: 581–601.

Nagata S (1975) Mixing: Principles and Applications. New York:Halsted Press.

Namiki A (2003) Can the mantle entrain D0? Journal ofGeophysical Research 108 (doi:10.1029/2002JB002315).

Namiki A and Kurita K (1999) The influence of boundaryheterogeneity in experimental models of mantle convection.Geophysical Research Letters 26: 1929–1932.

Namiki A and Kurita K (2001) The influence of boundaryheterogeneity in experimental models of mantle convectionwith internal heat sources. Physics of the Earth and PlanetaryInteriors 128: 195–205.

Namiki A and Kurita K (2002) Rayleigh-Benard convection withan inclined upper boundary. Physical Review E 65: 056301-1–10.

Namiki A and Kurita K (2003) Heat transfer and interfacialtemperature of the two-layered convection: Implications forthe D0-mantle coupling. Geophysical Research Letters 30(doi:10.1029/2002GL015809).

Nataf H-C, Froidevaux C, Levrat JL, and Rabinowicz M (1981)Laboratory convection experiments: effect of lateral coolingand generation of instabilities in the horizontal boundarylayers. Journal of Geophysical Research 86: 6143–6154.

Nataf H-C, Hager BH, and Scott RF (1984) Convectionexperiments in a centrifuge and the generation of plumes in avery viscous fluid. Annales de Geophysique 2: 303–310.

Nataf H-C, Moreno S, and Cardin P (1988) What is responsiblefor thermal coupling in layered convection? Journal ofPhysics France 49: 1707–1714.

Nataf H-C (1991) Mantle convection, plates and hotspots.Tectonophysics 187: 361–377.

Neavel KE and Johnson AM (1991) Entrainment incompositionally buoyant plumes. Tectonophysics 200: 1–15.

Nettleton LL (1934) Fluid mechanics of salt domes. AmericanAssociation of Petroleum Geologists Bulletin 18: 1175–1204.

Nettleton LL (1943) Recent experimental and geophysicalevidence of mechanics of salt-dome formation. AmericanAssociation of Petroleum Geologists Bulletin 27: 51–63.

Niemela JJ, Skrbek L, Sreenivasan KR, and Donelly RJ (2000)Turbulent convection at very high Rayleigh numbers. Nature404: 837–840.

Nishimura CE and Forsyth DL (1988) Rayleigh wave phasevelocities in the Pacific with implications for azimuthalanisotropy and lateral heterogeneities. Geophysical JournalInternational 94: 479–501.

Oblath N, Daniels K, and Bodenschatz E (2004) Spreading ratedependent morphology of mid-ocean-ridge-like dynamics.Physical Review Letters (submitted).

Oertel H and Buhler K (1978) A special differential interferometerused for heat convection investigations. International Journalof Heat and Mass Transfer 21: 1111–1115.

Ogawa M, Schubert G, and Zebib A (1991) Numericalsimulations of three-dimensional thermal convection in afluid with strongly temperature-dependent viscosity. Journalof Fluid Mechanics 233: 299–328.

Ogawa M (2003) Plate-like regime of a numerically modeledthermal convection in a fluid with temperature-, pressure-,

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 161

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 74: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

and stress-history-dependent viscosity. Journal ofGeophysical Research 108: doi:10.1029/2000JB000069.

Oldenburg DW and Brune JN (1972) Ridge transform faultspreading patterns in freezing wax. Science 178: 301–304.

Oldenburg DW and Brune JN (1975) Explanation for theothogonality of ocean ridges and transform faults. Journal ofGeophysical Research 80: 2575–85.

Olson P (1984) An experimental approach to thermal convectionin a two-layered mantle. Journal of Geophysical Research89: 11293–11301.

Olson P and Singer H (1985) Creeping plumes. Journal of FluidMechanics 158: 511–531.

Olson P and Nam IS (1986) Formation of seafloor swells bymantle plumes. Journal of Geophysical Research91: 7181–7191.

Olson P and Christensen UR (1986) Solitary wave propagationin a fluid conduit within a viscous matrix. Journal ofGeophysical Research 91: 6367–6374.

Olson P, Schubert G, Anderson C, and Goldman P (1988) Plumeformation and lithosphere erosion: a comparison oflaboratory and numerical experiments. Journal ofGeophysical Research 93: 15065–15084.

Olson P (1990) Hot spots, swells and mantle plumes.In: Ryan MP (ed.), Magma Transport and Storage, pp. 33–51.New York: Wiley.

Olson P and Kincaid C (1991) Experiments on the interaction ofthermal convection and compositional layering at the base ofthe mantle. Journal of Geophysical Research 96: 4347–4354.

Olson P, Schubert G, and Anderson C (1993) Structure ofaxisymmetric mantle plumes. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 98: 6829–6844.

Ottino JM, Leong CW, Rising H, and Swanson PD (1988)Morphological structures produced by mixing in chaoticflows. Nature 333: 419–426.

Ottino JM (1989) The Kinematics of Mixing: Stretching, Chaos,and Transport, 364 pp. Cambridge: Cambridge UniversityPress.

Park H, Dabiri D, and Gharib M (2000) Digital particle imagevelocimetry/thermometry and application to the wake of aheated circular cylinder. Experiments in Fluids 30: 327–338.

Parker TJ and McDowell AN (1951) Scale models as a guide tointerpretation of salt-dome faulting. American Association ofPetroleum Geologists Bulletin 35: 2076–2086.

Pearson JRA (1958) On convection cells induced by surfacetension. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 19: 489–500.

Parmentier EM, Turcotte DL, and Torrance KE (1975) Numericalexperiments on the structure of mantle plumes. Journal ofGeophysical Research 80: 4417–4424.

Parmentier EM and Sotin C (2000) Three-dimensional numericalexperiments on thermal convection in a very viscous fluid:Implications for the dynamics of a thermal boundary layer athigh Rayleigh number. Physics of Fluids 12: 609–617.

Parsons B and McKenzie DP (1978) Mantle convection and thethermal structure of the plates. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 82: 4485–4495.

Parsons B and Sclater JC (1977) An analysis of the variations ofocean floor bathymetry and heat flow with age. Journal ofGeophysical Research 82: 803–827.

Pindera JT and Krishnamurthy AR (1978) Characteristicrelations of flow birefringence: Part 2. Relations in Scatteredradiations. Experimental Mechanics 18: 41–48.

Pinet N and Cobbold PR (1992) Experimental insights into thepartitioning of motion within zones of oblique subduction.Tectonophysics 206: 371–388.

Plapp BB (1997) Spiral-pattern formation in Rayleigh–Benardconvection. PhD Thesis. Cornell University, Ithaca, NY.

Plapp BB, Egolf DA, Bodenschatz E, and Pesch W (1998)Dynamics and selection of giant spirals in Rayleigh-Benradconvection. Physical Review Letters 81: 5334–5337.

Pottebaum TS and Gharib M (2004) The pinch-off process in astarting buoyant plume. Experiments in Fluids 37: 87–94.

Pretzel G, Jager H, and Neger T (1993) High-accuracydifferential interferometry for the investigation of phaseobjects. Measurement Science and Technology 4: 649–658.

Pubellier M and Cobbold PR (1996) Analogue models for thetranspressional docking of volcanic arcs in the westernPacific. Tectonophysics 253: 33–52.

Qi JA, Leung CW, Wong WO, and Probert SD (2006)Temperature-field measurements of a premixed butane/aircircular impinging-flame using reference-beaminterferometry. Applied Energy 83: 1307–1316.

Raffel M, Willert C, and Kompenhans J (1998) Particle ImageVelocimetry. Springer.

Ragnarsson R, Ford JL, Santangelo CD, and Bodenschatz E(1996) Rifts in spreading wax layers. Physical Review Letters76: 3456–9.

Ramberg H (1967) Model experimentation of the effect ofgravity on tectonic processes. Geophysical Journal of theRoyal Astronomical Society 14: 307–329.

Ramberg H (1968) Instability of layered systems in the field ofgravity. Physics of the Earth and Planetary Interiors1: 427–447.

Ramberg H (1972) Mantle diapirism and its tectonic andmagmatic consequences. Physics of the Earth and PlanetaryInteriors 4: 45–60.

Ramberg H and Sjostrom H (1973) Experimental geodynamicalmodels relating to continental drift and orogenesis.Tectonophysics 19: 105–132.

Ramberg H and Ghosh SK (1977) Rotation and strain of linearand planar structures in three-dimensional progressivedeformation. Tectonophysics 40: 309–337.

Rasenat S, Busse FH, and Rehberg I (1989) A theoretical andexperimental study of double-layer convection. Journal ofFluid Mechanics 199: 519–540.

Rayleigh L (1883) Investigations of the character of anincompressible heavy fluid of variable density. Proceedingsof the London Mathematical Society 14: 170–177.

Rayleigh L (1916) On convection currents in a horizontal layer offluid, when the higher temperature is on the underside.Philosophical Magazine 32: 529–546.

Renardy Y and Joseph DD (1985) Oscillatory instability ina Benard problem of two fluids. Physics of Fluids28: 788–793.

Renardy Y and Joseph DD (1985) Perturbation analysis ofsteady and oscillatory onset in a Benard problem with twosimilar liquids. Physics of Fluids 28: 2699–2708.

Reynolds O (1894) Study of fluid motion by means of coloredbands. Nature 50: 161–164.

Rhee H, Koseff J, and Street R (1984) Flow visualization of arecirculating flow by rheoscopic and liquid crystaltechniques. Experiments in Fluids 2: 57–64.

Ribe NM (1998) Spouting and planform selection in theRayleigh–Taylor instability of miscible viscous fluids. Journalof Fluid Mechanics 234: 315–336.

Ribe NM (2003) Periodic folding of viscous sheets. PhysicalReview E 68: 036305.

Ribe NM and Christensen U (1994) Three-dimensional modelingof plume-lithosphere interaction. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 99: 669–682.

Ribe NM and de Valpine DP (1994) The global hotspotdistribution and instability of D9. Geophysical ResearchLetters 21: 1507–1510.

Ribe NM, Christensen UR, and Theissing J (1995) The dynamicsof pllume-ridge interaction, 1: Ridge-centered plumes. Earthand Planetary Science Letters 134: 155–168.

Ribe NM and Christensen U (1999) The dynamical origin ofHawaiian volcanism. Earth and Planetary Science Letters171: 517–531.

162 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 75: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Ribe NM, Stutzmann E, Ren Y, and van der Hilst R (2007)Buckling instabilities of subducted lithosphere beneath thetransition zone. Earth and Planetary Science Letters254: 173–179.

Richards MA and Griffiths RW (1988) Deflection of plumes bymantle shear flow: Experimental results and a simple theory.Geophysical Journal 94: 367–376.

Richards MA, Duncan RA, and Courtillot VE (1989) Floodbasalts and hot-spot tracks: Plume heads and tails. Science246: 103–107.

Richter FM (1973) Convection and the large-scale circulation ofthe mantle. Journal of Geophysical Research 78: 8735–8745.

Richter FM (1978) Experiments on the stability of convectionrolls in fluids whose viscosity depends on temperature.Journal of Fluid Mechanics 89: 553.

Richter FM and Johnson CE (1974) Stability of a chemicallylayered mantle. Journal of Geophysical Research79: 1635–1639.

Richter FM and Parsons B (1975) On the interaction of twoscales of convection in the mantle. Journal of GeophysicalResearch 80: 2529–2541.

Richter FM and McKenzie DP (1978) Simple plate models ofmantle convection. Journal of Geophysics 44: 441.

Richter FM and McKenzie DP (1981) On some consequencesand possible causes of layered convection. Journal ofGeophysical Research 86: 6133–6124.

Richter FM, Nataf H-C, and Daly SF (1983) Heat transfer andhorizontally averaged temperature of convection with largeviscosity variations. Journal of Fluid Mechanics129: 173–192.

Rossby HT (1965) On thermal convection driven by non-uniformheating form below: an experimental study. Deep-SeaResearch 12: 9–16.

Rossby HT (1969) A study of Benard convection with andwithout convection. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 36: 309–35.

Rouzo S, Rabinowicz M, and Briais A (1995) Segmentation ofmid-ocean ridges with an axial valley induced by small-scaleconvection. Nature 374: 795–798.

Rumford C (1798) Heat is a form of motion: An experiment inBoring Cannon. Philosophical Transactions vol. 88.

Russo RM and Silver PG (1994) Trench-parallel flow beneaththe Nazca plate from seismic anisotropy. Science263: 1105–1111.

Samuel H and Farnetani CG (2002) Thermochemical convectionand helium concentrations in mantle plumes. Earth andPlanetary Science Letters 207: 39–56.

Samuel H and Bercovici (2006) Oscillating and stagnatingplumes in the Earth’s lower mantle. Earth and PlanetaryScience Letters 248: 90–105.

Schaeffer N and Manga M (2001) Interaction of rising andsinking mantle plumes. Geophysical Research Letters21: 765–768.

Schellart WP (2002) Analogue modelling of large-scale tectonicprocesses. Journal of Virtual Explorer 7: 1–6.

Schellart WP (2004a) Kinematics of subduction andsubduction-induced flow in the upper mantle. Journal ofGeophysical Research 109: B07401 (doi:10.1029/2004JB002970).

Schellart WP (2004b) Quantifying the net slab pull force as adriving mechanism for plate tectonics. GeophysicalResearch Letters 31: L07611 (doi:10.1029/2004GL019528).

Schellart WP (2005) Influence of the subducting plate velocityon the geometry of the slab and migration of the subudtcionhinge. Earth and Planetary Science Letters 231: 197–219.

Schilling J-G (1991) Fluxes and excess temperatures of mantleplumes inferred from their interaction with migrating mid-ocean ridges. Nature 352: 397–403.

Schmitz E and Merzkirch W (1981) A test fluid for simulatingblood flows. Experiments in Fluids 2: 103–104.

Schmeling H (1988) Numerical models of Rayleigh-Taylorinstabilities superimposed upon convection. Bulletin,Geological Institute, University of Uppsala 14: 95–109.

Schmeling H, Cada M, Babeyko A, et al. (2004) A benchmarkcomparison of subduction models. Geophysical ResearchAbstracts 6: 01484.

Schmidt RJ and Milverton SW (1935) On the instability of a fluidwhen heated from below. Proceedings of the Royal Societyof London A 152: 586–594.

Schubert G, Olson P, Anderson, and Goldman P (1989) Solitarywaves in mantle plumes. Journal of Geophysical Research94: 9523–9532.

Schubert G, Masters G, Olson P, and Tackley P (2004)Superplumes or plume clusters? Physics of the Earth andPlanetary Interiors 146: 147–162.

Schwiderski EW and Schwab HJA (1971) Convectionexperiments with electrolytically heated fluid layers. Journalof Fluid Mechanics 48: 703–717.

Scott DR, Stevenson DJ, and Whitehead JA (1986)Observations of solitary waves in a viscously deformablepipe. Nature 319: 759–761.

Selig F (1965) A theoretical prediction if salt-dome patterns.Geophysics 30: 633–645.

Sernas V and Fletcher LS (1970) A schlieren interferometermethod for heat transfer studies. Journal of Heat Transfer92: 202–204.

Settles GS (2001) Schlieren and Shadowgraph Techniques;Visualizing Phenomena in Transparent Media. Heidelberg:Springer-Verlag.

Shemenda AI (1992) Horizontal lithosphere compression andsubduction: Constraints provided by physical modeling.Journal of Geophysical Research 97: 1097–1116.

Shemenda AI (1993) Subduction of the lithoshpere and back arcdynamics: Insights from physical modeling. Journal ofGeophysical Research 98: 16167–16185.

Shlien DJ (1976) Some laminar thermal and plume experiments.Physics of Fluids 19: 1089–1098.

Shlien DJ and Thompson DJ (1975) Some experiments on themotion of an isolated laminar thermal. Journal of FluidMechanics 72: 35–47.

Shlien DJ and Boxman RL (1979) Temperature fieldmeasurement of an axisymmetric laminar plume. Physics ofFluids 22: 631–634.

Shlien DJ and Brosh A (1979) Velocity field measurements of alaminar thermal. Physics of Fluids 22: 1044–1053.

Shlien DJ and Boxman RL (1981) Laminar starting plumetemperature field measurement. International Journal of Heatand Mass Transfer 24: 919–930.

Schouten J, Klitgord KD, and Whitehead JA (1985)Segmentation of midocean ridges. Nature 317: 225–229.

Siggia (1994) High Rayleigh number convection. Annual Reviewof Fluid Mechanics 26: 137–168.

Sigurdsson H and Sparks SRJ (1978) lateral magam flow withinrifted Icelandic crust. Nature 274: 126–130.

Silveston PL (1958) Warmedurchgang in waagerechtenFlussigkeitschichten. Forschung im Ingenieurwesen24: 59–69.

Skilbeck JN and Whitehead JA (1978) Formation of discreteislands in linear islands chains. Nature 272: 499–501.

Sleep NH (1988) Gradual entrainment of a chemical layer at thebase of the mantle by overlying convection. GeophysicalJournal 95: 437–447.

Sleep NH (1990) Hotspots and mantle plumes: Somephenomenology. Journal of Geophysical Research95: 6715–6736.

Sleep NH (1994) Lithospheric thinning by midplate mantleplumes and the tehrmal history of hot plume material pondedat sublithospheric depths. Journal of Geophysical Research99: 9327–9343.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 163

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 76: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

Small RD, Sernas VA, and Page RH (1972) Single beamschlieren interferometer using a Wollaston prism. AppliedOptics 11: 858–862.

Solomatov S (1995) Scaling of temperature- and stress-dependent viscosity convection. Physics of Fluids 7: 266–274.

Solomatov VS and Moresi LN (2000) Scaling of time-dependentstagnant lid convection: Application to small-scaleconvection on Earth and other terrestrial planets. Journal ofGeophysical Research 105: 21785–21817.

Solomon TH and Gollub JP (1988a) Passive transport in SteadyRayleigh-Benard Convection. Physics of Fluids31, 1372–1379.

Solomon TH and Gollub JP (1988b) Chaotic Particle Transportin Time-Dependent Rayleigh–Benard Convection. PhysicalReview A 38: 6280–6286.

Solomon TH and Gollub JP (1990) Sheared boundary layers inturbulert Rayleigh–Benard convection. Physical ReviewLetters 64: 3102–3106.

Solomon T and Gollub J (1991) Thermal boundary layers andheat flux in turbulent convection: the role of recirculatingflows. Physical Review A 43: 6683–6693.

Solomon TH, Tomas S, and Warner (1996) The Role of Lobes inChaotic Mixing of Miscible and Immiscible Impurities.Physical Review Letters 77: 2682–2685.

Solomon TH and Mezic I (2003) Uniform resonant chaoticmixing in fluid flows. Nature 425: 376–380.

Sotin C and Parmentier EM (1989) On the stability of a fluid layercontaining a univariant phase transition: application toplanetary interiors. Physics of the Earth and PlanetaryInteriors 55: 10–25.

Sparks DW and Parmentier EM (1993) The structure of three-dimensional convection beneath oceanic spreading centers.Geophysical Journal International 112: 81–91.

Sparrow EM, Husar RB, and Goldstein RJ (1970) Observationsand other characteristics of thermals. Journal of FluidMechanics 41: 793–800.

Stacey FD and Loper DE (1983) The thermal boundary layerinterpretation of D0 and its role as a plume source. Physics ofthe Earth and Planetary Interiors 33: 45–55.

Stacey FD and Loper DE (1984) Thermal histories of the coreand mantle. Physics of the Earth and Planetary Interiors36: 99–115.

Stein C, Schmalz G, and Hansen U (2004) The effects ofrheological parameters on plate behaviour in a self-consistent model of mantle convection. Physics of the Earthand Planetary Interiors 142: 225–255.

Stengel KC, Oliver DS, and Booker JR (1982) Onset ofconvection in a variable-viscosity fluid. Journal of FluidMechanics 120: 411–431.

Swanson WM and Green RL (1969) Colloidal suspensionproperties of Milling Yellow dye. Journal of Colloid andInterface Science 29: 161–163.

Tackley PJ (1998) Three-dimensional simulations of mantleconvection with a thermo-chemical basal boundary layer:D0? In: Gurnis M, Wysession M, Knittle E, and Buffett B (eds.)The Core-Mantle Boundary Region, pp. 231–253.Washington, DC: AGU.

Tackley PJ (2000) Self-consistent generation of tectonic platesin time-dependent, threedimensional mantle convectionsimulations. 1. Pseudoplastic yielding. Geochemistry,Geophysics, Geosystems 1: 2000Gc000041.

Tackley PJ (2002) Strong heterogeneity caused by deep mantlelayering. Geochemistry, Geophysics, Geosystems 3(4) 1024doi: 10.1029/2001GC000167.

Tait S and Jaupart C (1989) Compositional convection inviscous melts. Nature 338: 571–574.

Tamai N and Asaeda T (1984) Sheetlike plumes near a heatedbottom plate at large Rayleigh number. Journal ofGeophysical Research 89: 727–734.

Tan E, Gurnis M, and Han L (2002) Slabs in the lower mantle andtheir modulation of plume formation. Geochemistry,Geophysics, Geosystems 3 (doi:10.1029/2001GC000238).

Tan E and Gurnis M (2005) Metastable superplumes and mantlecompressibility. Geophysical Research Letters 32(doi:10.1029/2005GL024190).

Tanner LH (1966) Some applications of holographyin fluid mechanics. Journal of Scientific Instruments43: 81–83.

Tanny J and Shlien DJ (1985) Velocity field measurements of alaminar starting plume. Physics of Fluids 28: 1027–1032.

Taylor G (1950) The instability of liquid surfaces whenaccelerated in a direction perpendicaular to their planes.Proceedings of the Royal Society of London Series A201: 192–196.

Thompson PF and Tackley PJ (1998) Generation of mega-plumes from the core-mantle boundary in a compressiblemantle with temperature-dependent viscosity. GeophysicalResearch Letters 25, 1999–2002.

Thomson J (1882) On a changing tesselated structure in certainliquids. Proceedings of the Philosophical Society of Glasgow13: 464–468.

Torrance KE and Turcotte DL (1971) Thermal convection withlarge viscosity variations. Journal of Fluid Mechanics47: 113–125.

Townsend AA (1957) Temperature fluctuations over a heatedhorizontal surface. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 5: 209–241.

Tritton DJ and Zarraga MM (1967) Convection in horizontal fluidlayers with internal heat generation experiments. Journal ofFluid Mechanics 30: 21–31.

Trompert RA and Hansen U (1998) On the Rayleigh numberdependence of convection with a strongly Temperature-dependent viscosity. Physics of Fluids 10: 351–360.

Tsinober AB, Yahalom Y, and Shlien DJ (1983) A point source ofheat in a stable salinity gradient. Journal of Fluid Mechanics135: 199–217.

Turner JS (1973) Convection in the mantle: a laboratory modelwith temperature-dependent viscosity. Earth and PlanetaryScience Letters 17: 369–374.

van Keken P (1997) Evolution of starting mantle plumes: acomparison between numerical and laboratory models.Earth and Planetary Science Letters 148: 1–11.

van Keken P, King S, Schmeling H, Christensen U,Neumeister D, and Doin M-P (1997) A comparison ofmethods for the modeling of thermochemical convection.Journal of Geophysical Research 102: 22477–22496.

Vasquez PA, Perez AT, and Castellanos A (1996) Thermal andelectrohydrodynamics plumes. A comparative study.Physics of Fluids 8: 2091–2096.

Vatteville J (2004) Etude experimentale des panaches:Structure et evolution temporelle. Memoire de DEA, ENSLyon/IPG Paris.

Verzicco R (2004) Effect of non-perfect thermal sources inturbulent thermal convection. Physics of Fluids16: 1965–1975.

Villermaux E and Innocenti C (1999) On the geometry ofturbulent mixing. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 393: 123–147.

Voth GA, Haller G, and Gollub JP (2002) ExperimentalMeasurements of stretching Fields in Fluid Mixing. PhysicalReview Letters 88: 254501.1–254501.4.

Weeraratne D and Manga M (1998) Transitions in the style ofmantle convection at high Rayleigh numbers. Earth andPlanetary Science Letters 160: 563–568.

Weijermars R (1986) Flow behavior and physical chemistry ofBouncing Putties and related polymers in view of tectonicslaboratory applications. Tectonophysics 124: 325–358.

Weijermars R and Schmeling H (1986) Scaling of Newtonian andnon-Newtonian fluid dynamics without inertia for quantitativemodelling of rock flow due to gravity (including the concept

164 Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165

Page 77: Author's personal copy 7.03 Laboratory Studies of Mantle ...hebergement.u-psud.fr/master2dfe/IMG/pdf/TOGanneRED.pdf · Author's personal copy When Pr>>1, the fluid motion stops as

Author's personal copy

of rheological similarity). Physics of the Earth and PlanetaryInteriors 43: 316–330.

Weijermars R (1988) New laboratory method for analyzingdeformation and displacement in creeping fluid: Examplesfrom stokes flow and a thermal plume. Journal ofGeophysical Research 93: 2179–2190.

Weijermars R (1989) Experimental pictures of deformationpatterns in a possible model of the earth’s interior. Earth andPlanetary Science Letters 91: 367–373.

Weinstein SA and Olson PL (1989) The proximity of hotspots toconvergent and divergent plate boundaries. GeophysicalResearch Letters 16: 433–436.

Weinstein SA and Olson P (1990) Planforms in thermalconvection with internal heat sources at large Rayleigh andPrandtl numbers. Geophysical Research Letters17: 239–242.

Weinstein SA and Christensen UR (1991) Convection planformsin a fluid with a temperature-dependent viscosity beneath astress-free upper boundary. Geophysical Research Letters18: 2035–2038.

Wenzel MJ, Manga M, and Jellinek AM (2004) Tharsis as aconsequence of Mars’dichotomy and layered mantle.Geophysical Research Letters 31 (doi:10.1029/2003GL019306).

White DB (1988) The planforms and onset of convection with atemperature-dependent viscosity fluid? Journal of FluidMechanics 191: 247–286.

Whitehead JA (1972) Moving heaters as a model of continentaldrift. Physics of the Earth and Planetary Interiors18: 199–212.

Whitehead JA and Luther DS (1975) Dynamics of laboratorydiapir and plume models. Journal of Geophysical Research80: 705–717.

Whitehead JA (1976) Convection models: Laboratory versusmantle. Tectonophysics 35: 215–228.

Whitehead JA and Parsons B (1978) Oberservations ofconvection at Rayleigh numbers up to 760000 in a fluid withlarge Prandtl number. Geophysical and Astrophysical FluidDynamics 9: 201–217.

Whitehead JA (1982) Instabilities of fluid conduits in a flowingEarth – Are plates lubricated by the asthenosphere?Geophysical Journal of the Royal Astronomical Society70: 415–433.

Whitehead JA, Dick HHB, and Schouten H (1984) A mechanismfor magmatic accretion under spreading centers. Nature312: 146–148.

Whitehead JA (1986) Buoyancy driven instabilities of lowviscosity zones as models of magma-rich zones. SpecialIssue: Partial Melting Phenomena in the Earth and PlanetaryEvolution. Journal of Geophysical Research 91: 9303–9314.

Whitehead JA and Helfrich KR (1988) Wave transport of deepmantle material. Nature 336: 59–61.

Whittaker RJ and Lister JR (2006) Steady axisymmetriccreeping plumes above a planar boundary. Part I: A pointsource. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 567: 361–378.

Whittaker RJ and Lister JR (2006) Steady axisymmetriccreeping plumes above a planar boundary. Part II: Adistributed source. Journal of Fluid Mechanics 567: 379–397.

Wilcock WSD and Whitehead JA (1991) The Rayleigh–Taylorinstability of an embedded layer of low-viscosity fluid.Journal of Geophysical Research 96: 12193–12200.

Willert C and Gharib M (1991) Digital particle imagethermometry. Experiments in Fluids 10: 181–193.

Willis GE and Deardorff JW (1967) Confirmation andrenumbering of the discrete heat flux transitions of Malkus.Physics of Fluids 10: 1861–1866.

Wilson TJ (1963) Evidence from islands on the spreading of theocean floor. Canadian Journal of Physics 41: 863–868.

Worster MG (1986) The axisymmetric laminar plume:Asymptotic solution for large Prandtl number. Studies inApplied Mathematics 75: 139–152.

Xi H-D, Lam S, and Xia K-Q (2004) From laminar plumes toorganized flows: The onset of large-scale circulation inturbulent thermal convection. Journal of Fluid Mechanics503: 47–56.

Yang W-J (1989) Handbook of Flow Visualization. Washington,DC: Taylor and Francis.

Zaranek SE and Parmentier EM (2004) The onset of convectionin fluids with strongly temperature-dependent viscositycooled from above with implications for planetarylithospheres. Earth and Planetary Science Letters224: 71–386.

Zhang J, Childress S, and Libchaber A (1997) Non-Boussinesqeffect: Thermal convection with broken symmetry. Physics ofFluids 9: 1034–1042.

Zhang J, Childress S, and Libchaber A (1998) Non-Boussinesqeffect: Asymmetric velocity profiles in thermal convection.Physics of Fluids 10: 1534–1536.

Zhang J and Libchaber A (2000) Periodic boundary motion inthermal turbulence. Physical Review Letters 84: 4361–4364.

Zhong J-Q and Zhang J (2005) Thermal convection with a freelymoving top boundary. Physics of Fluids 17: 115105.

Laboratory Studies of Mantle Convection 165

Treatise on Geophysics, vol. 7, pp. 89-165